Post on 28-Feb-2019
CONSTRUCT INSTALLATION SECURITY FENCING, AIR TO GROUND RANGE
CYPR 152302
9 July 2018
CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS
PREPARED BY:
CRTC-BAC/Civil Engineering 4715 Hewes Ave., Bldg. 132 Gulfport, MS 39507-4324
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
TOC Page ii
Table of Contents
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK ............................................. 1 PART 1
1.01 GENERAL .......................................................... 1 SUBMITTALS ....................................................... 1
1.02 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ............................... 1 1.03 EXISTING WORK .................................................... 2 ]1.04 ON-SITE PERMITS .................................................. 2 1.05
PART 2 PART 3
LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES ................................ 3 PRODUCTS ......................................................... 3 EXECUTION ........................................................ 3
SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS ........................................... 4 PART 1
1.01 GENERAL .......................................................... 4 SUBMITTALS ....................................................... 4
1.02 SPECIAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS .................................. 4 ]1.03 CONTRACTOR ACCESS AND USE OF PREMISES ............................ 4 1.04 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS ............................................ 6
PART 2 PRODUCTS ......................................................... 9 PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 10
SECTION 01 20 00.00 20 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES .......................... 11 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 11
1.1 SUBMITTALS ...................................................... 11 1.2 NGB FORM 3065, CONTRACT PROGRESS REPORT .......................... 11 1.3 CONTRACTOR'S INVOICE ............................................. 11 1.4 PAYMENTS FOR MATERIALS ........................................... 12 1.5 CERTIFIED PAYROLLS ............................................... 12
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 13 PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 13
SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS ................................. 14 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 14
1.1 SUBMITTALS ...................................................... 14 1.2 MINIMUM INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS ................................... 14 1.3 SUPERVISION ..................................................... 14 1.4 MEETINGS ........................................................ 15 1.5 STATEMENT OF ACKNOWLEDGMENT ...................................... 16 1.6 CONTRACT MANPOWER REPORTING (CMRA) ............................... 16
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 16 PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 17
SECTION 01 32 53 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION ................................. 18 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 18
1.01 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) ............................... 18 PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 20 PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 20
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ........................................ 21 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 21
1.1 SUMMARY ......................................................... 21 1.2 SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTIONS ........................................... 21 1.3 SUBMITTALS ...................................................... 23 1.4 SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION ......................................... 23 1.5 FORWARDING SUBMITTALS REQUIRING GOVERNMENT APPROVAL .............. 24
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
TOC Page iii
1.6 PREPARATION ..................................................... 24 1.7 ELETRONIC FILE FORMAT ............................................ 24 1.8 CONTRACTOR QC APPROVAL ........................................... 25 1.9 SUBMITTAL REGISTER ............................................... 25 1.10 VARIATIONS/SUBSTITUTIONS ........................................ 26 1.11 DISAPPROVED OR REJECTED SUBMITTALS ............................... 26 1.12 APPROVED/ACCEPTED SUBMITTALS ..................................... 27
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 27 PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 27
SECTION 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ............................ 28 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 28
1.1 REFERENCES ...................................................... 28 1.2 SUBMITTALS ...................................................... 29 1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS .......................................... 29 1.4 SITE SAFETY ANFD HEALTH OFFICER (SSHO) ........................... 29 1.5 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION .................................... 29 1.6 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT ...................................... 30 1.7 NOTIFICATIONS and REPORTS ........................................ 30 1.8 HOT WORK......................................................... 30 1.9 HAZARDOUS ENERGY CONTROL PROGRAM (HECP) REQUIREMENTS ............. 30 1.10 SEVERE STORM REQUIREMENTS ........................................ 30
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 31 PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 31
3.1 CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER WORK ...................................... 31 3.2 PRE-OUTAGE COORDINATION MEETING .................................. 32 3.3 CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (LOCKOUT/TAGOUT) ..................... 32 3.4 EQUIPMENT ....................................................... 32 3.5 ELECTRICAL ...................................................... 32
SECTION 01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS .......................... 34 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 34
1.1 REFERENCES ...................................................... 34 1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION ............................................. 34
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 37 PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 38
SECTION 01 45 00.10 20 QUALITY CONTROL FOR MINOR CONSTRUCTION ................ 39 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 39
1.1 QC PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS .......................................... 39 1.2 TESTING LABORATORY REQUIREMENTS .................................. 39 1.3 COMPLETION INSPECTIONS ........................................... 40 1.4 DOCUMENTATION ................................................... 41 1.5 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ................................................ 41 1.6 NOTIFICATION ON NON-COMPLIANCE ................................... 42
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 42 PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 42
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS .............. 43 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 43
1.1 REFERENCES ...................................................... 43 1.2 HURRICANE CONDITION OF READINESS ................................. 43
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 44 2.1 TEMPORARY SIGNAGE ................................................ 44 2.2 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL ........................................ 44 2.3 TEMPORARY WIRING................................................. 44
PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 44 3.1 EMPLOYEE PARKING................................................. 45
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
TOC Page iv
3.2 TEMPORARY BULLETIN BOARD ......................................... 45 3.3 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES ......................... 45 [3.04 TRAFFIC PROVISIONS ............................................... 46 3.5 DUMPSTERS ....................................................... 47 3.6 CLEANUP ......................................................... 47 3.7 RESTORATION OF STORAGE AREA ...................................... 47
SECTION 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS ............................ 48 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 48
1.1 REFERENCES ...................................................... 48 1.2 SUBMITTALS ...................................................... 48 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS ............................ 49 1.4 SPECIAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ............................... 49 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................ 50 1.6 LICENSES AND PERMITS ............................................. 51 1.7 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT PERMIT .................................... 51
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 51 PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 51
3.1 WASTE DETERMINATION .............................................. 51 3.2 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL .................................... 52 3.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MANAGEMENT .................................... 53 3.4 MILITARY MUNITIONS ............................................... 54 3.5 PETROLEUM, OIL, LUBRICANT (POL) STORAGE AND FUELING .............. 54 3.6 INADVERTENT DISCOVERY OF PETROLEUM-CONTAMINATED SOIL OR HAZARDOUS
WASTES........................................................... 54
SECTION 01 71 23 FIELD ENGINEERING ........................................... 55 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 55
1.1 SUMMARY ......................................................... 55 1.2 BASE CIVIL ENGINEERING (BCE) WORK CLEARANCE REQUEST .............. 55 1.3 GOVERNMENT'S RESPONSIBILITY ...................................... 55 1.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY ...................................... 55
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 56 PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 56
SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT ................ 57 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 57
1.1 GOVERNMENT POLICY ................................................ 57 1.2 MANAGEMENT ...................................................... 57 1.3 SUBMITTALS ...................................................... 57 1.4 RECORDS ......................................................... 57 1.5 REPORTS ......................................................... 58 1.6 COLLECTION ...................................................... 58 1.7 DISPOSAL ........................................................ 59
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 59 PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 59
SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS ......................................... 60 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 60
1.1 REFERENCES ...................................................... 60 1.2 DEFINITIONS ..................................................... 60 1.3 SUBMITTALS ...................................................... 60 1.4 QUALITY CONTROL.................................................. 61
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 61 PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 61
3.1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS ................................................ 61
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
TOC Page v
3.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ................................ 63 3.3 CLEANUP ......................................................... 63 3.4 REAL PROPERTY RECORD ............................................. 64
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA .............................. 65 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 65
1.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ................................... 65 1.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FILE FORMAT ..................... 65 1.3 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGES ............... 65 1.4 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES .............. 70
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 70 PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 70
3.01 TRAINING ........................................................ 70
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION .................................................. 72 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 72
1.1 REFERENCES ...................................................... 72 1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION .............................................. 72 1.3 ITEMS TO REMAIN IN PLACE ......................................... 72 1.4 BURNING ......................................................... 73 1.5 AVAILABILITY OF WORK AREAS ....................................... 73 1.6 SUBMITTALS ...................................................... 74 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................ 74 1.8 PROTECTION ...................................................... 74 1.9 RELOCATIONS ..................................................... 74 1.10 EXISTING CONDITIONS .............................................. 75
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 75 PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 75
3.1 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED ................................ 75 3.2 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL .......................................... 76 3.3 CLEANUP ......................................................... 76 3.4 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS .................................... 76
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 77
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY
NOT PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 05 - METALS
SECTION 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS ............................ 78 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 78
1.1 REFERENCES ...................................................... 78 1.2 SUBMITTALS ...................................................... 78 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION ................................ 78
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 78 2.1 MATERIALS ....................................................... 78
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
TOC Page vi
2.2 FABRICATION FINISHES ............................................ 79 2.3 BOLLARDS/PIPE GUARDS ............................................ 79
PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 79 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ............................... 79 3.2 WORKMANSHIP ..................................................... 79 3.3 ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS, AND CONNECTIONS........................... 80 3.4 BUILT-IN WORK ................................................... 80 3.5 DISSIMILAR METALS ............................................... 80 3.6 PREPARATION ..................................................... 80 3.7 INSTALLATION OF BOLLARDS/PIPE GUARDS............................. 80
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
NOT PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
NOT PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
NOT PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
SECTION 09 06 00 SCHEDULES FOR FINISHES ...................................... 82 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 82
1.01 SUMMARY ......................................................... 82 PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 82
2.1 COLOR SCHEDULE................................................... 82 2.2 EXTERIOR FINISHES ................................................ 82
PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 82
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
NOT PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
NOT PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
NOT PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
NOT PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
NOT PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPRESSION
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
TOC Page vii
NOT PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
NOT PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATION, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
NOT PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 25 - INTEGRATED AUTOMATION
NOT PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ................ 83 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 83
1.1 REFERENCES ...................................................... 83 1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS ............................................. 83 1.3 DEFINITIONS ..................................................... 83 1.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS ....................................... 84 1.5 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION ................................ 84 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................ 84 1.7 WARRANTY ........................................................ 85 1.8 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .................................... 85 1.9 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE ......................................... 85 1.10 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES ...................................... 86 1.11 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS .......................................... 86 1.12 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL .............................. 86
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 86 2.01 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH ........................................... 86
PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 86 3.1 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING ........................................... 87 3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING .............................. 87
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL .................... 88 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 88
1.1 REFERENCES ...................................................... 88 1.2 DEFINITIONS ..................................................... 89 1.3 SUBMITTALS ...................................................... 89 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................ 90
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 90 2.01 EQUIPMENT ....................................................... 90
PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 92 3.1 PREPARATION ..................................................... 92 3.2 INSTALLATION .................................................... 92 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ............................................ 95
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATION
NOT PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
TOC Page viii
SECTION 28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROL/TELEPHONE ENTRY SYSTEMS ...................... 97 PART 1 GENERAL ......................................................... 97
1.1 SUBMITTALS ...................................................... 97 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ................................................ 97 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING .................................. 98 1.4 WARRANTY ........................................................ 98
PART 2 PRODUCTS ........................................................ 98 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS ......................................... 98 2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................................... 98 2.3 EQUIPMENT ....................................................... 99 2.4 MOUNTING POST .................................................... 99
PART 3 EXECUTION ....................................................... 99 3.1 INSTALLATION .................................................... 99 3.2 GROUNDING ...................................................... 100 3.3 SYSTEM INITIALIZING AND PROGRAMMING ............................. 100 3.4 SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES .......................................... 100 3.5 OWNER INSTRUCTIONS .............................................. 101 3.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ....................................... 101
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK
SECTION 31 00 00 EARTHWORK .................................................. 102 PART 1 GENERAL ........................................................ 102
1.1 REFERENCES ..................................................... 102 1.2 DEFINITIONS .................................................... 103 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................................. 104 1.4 SUBMITTALS ..................................................... 104 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................. 104 1.6 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING ............................................ 104 1.7 REQUIREMENTS FOR OFFSITE SOILS .................................. 105 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................... 105
PART 2 PRODUCTS ....................................................... 105 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS.................................................. 105 2.2 UTILITY BEDDING MATERIAL ........................................ 106 2.3 BORROW ......................................................... 106 2.4 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE .......................... 106 2.5 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING .......................... 107
PART 3 EXECUTION ...................................................... 107 3.1 PROTECTION ..................................................... 107 3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION ............................................. 108 3.3 GENERAL EXCAVATION .............................................. 108 3.4 SUBGRADE PREPARATION ............................................ 109 3.5 SELECTION OF BORROW MATERIAL .................................... 110 3.6 BURIED TAPE AND DETECTION WIRE .................................. 110 3.7 FILLING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION ............................. 111 3.8 SPECIAL EARTHWORK REQUIREMENTS .................................. 113 3.9 FINISHING ...................................................... 113 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ........................................... 113 3.11 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL ................................. 114
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
SECTION 32 01 19 JOINT SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS ....... 116 PART 1 GENERAL ........................................................ 116
1.1 REFERENCES ..................................................... 116 1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................... 116
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
TOC Page ix
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................... 117 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................. 117 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................... 117
PART 2 PRODUCTS ....................................................... 117 2.1 SEALANTS ....................................................... 117 2.2 BACKUP MATERIALS................................................ 117 2.3 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL ........................................ 117
PART 3 EXECUTION ...................................................... 118 3.1 EXECUTING EQUIPMENT ............................................. 118 3.2 PREPARATION OF JOINTS ........................................... 118 3.3 PREPARATION OF SEALANT .......................................... 119 3.4 INSTALLATION OF SEALANT ......................................... 119 3.5 INSPECTION ..................................................... 120 3.6 CLEAN-UP ....................................................... 120
SECTION 32 11 16.16 BASE COURSE FOR RIGID PAVING ............................ 121 PART 1 GENERAL ........................................................ 121
1.1 REFERENCES ..................................................... 121 1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................... 122 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................. 122 1.4 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT .......................................... 122 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS ...................................... 123
PART 2 PRODUCTS ....................................................... 123 2.1 MATERIALS ...................................................... 123 2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL .......................................... 124
PART 3 EXECUTION ...................................................... 124 3.1 GRADE CONTROL ................................................... 124 3.2 PLACING AND MIXING .............................................. 124 3.3 COMPACTING AND FINISHING ........................................ 124 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ........................................... 124 3.5 MAINTENANCE .................................................... 125
SECTION 32 16 13.01 CONCRETE MOW STRIP ...................................... 143
PART 1 ..................................................................... GENERAL .................................................................. 143
1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................................. 143 PART 2 PRODUCTS ....................................................... 143
2.1 CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT ...................................... 143 2.2 JOINT FILLERS AND SEALANTS ...................................... 143
PART 3 EXECUTION ...................................................... 143 3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION ............................................ 143 3.2 MOW STRIP REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT ............................... 143 3.3 MOW STRIP CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING ...................... 143 3.4 MOW STRIP JOINTS ................................................ 144 3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION ........................................... 144
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 144
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
TOC Page x
PART 1 GENERAL ........................................................ 143 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .............................................. 143
PART 2 PRODUCTS ....................................................... 143 2.3 CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT ...................................... 143 2.4 JOINT FILLERS AND SEALANTS ...................................... 143
PART 3 EXECUTION ...................................................... 143 3.6 SUBGRADE PREPARATION ............................................ 143 3.7 MOW STRIP REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT ............................... 143 3.8 MOW STRIP CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING ...................... 143 3.9 MOW STRIP JOINTS ................................................ 144 3.10 CURING AND PROTECTION ........................................... 144 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ........................................... 144
SECTION 32 31 13.53 HIGH-SECURITY CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES ............... 145 PART 1 GENERAL ........................................................ 145
1.1 REFERENCES ..................................................... 145 1.2 SUBMITTALS ..................................................... 146 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................... 147 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................. 147
PART 2 PRODUCTS ....................................................... 147 2.1 ZINC COATING.................................................... 148 2.2 FENCE FABRIC.................................................... 148 2.3 POSTS .......................................................... 149 2.4 BRACES AND RAILS ................................................ 149 2.5 WIRE ........................................................... 149 2.6 CONCRETE ....................................................... 150 2.7 GATES .......................................................... 150 2.8 GATE OPERATOR ................................................... 151 2.9 ACCESS CONTROL/TELEPHONE ENTRY SYSTEM ........................... 151 2.10 FENCE AND GATE CABLE REINFORCEMENT .............................. 151 2.11 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT ...................................... 151
PART 3 EXECUTION ...................................................... 152 3.1 FENCE INSTALLATION .............................................. 152 3.2 POST INSTALLATION ............................................... 153 3.3 EARTH AND BEDROCK ............................................... 153 3.4 CONCRETE MOW TRIP ............................................... 154 3.5 BRACES AND RAILS ................................................ 154 3.6 FABRIC INSTALLATION ............................................. 154 3.7 BARBED WIRE AND BARBED WIRE SUPPORTING ARMS ..................... 155 3.8 GATE INSTALLATION ............................................... 155 3.9 CABLE REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION FOR FENCES AND GATES ........... 155 3.10 TOLERANCES ..................................................... 156 3.11 ZINC COATING REPAIR ............................................. 157 3.12 GROUNDING ...................................................... 157 3.13 SECURITY ....................................................... 157 3.14 CLEANUP ........................................................ 157
SECTION 32 31 14 ELECTRIC GATE OPERATOR ..................................... 158 PART 1 GENERAL ........................................................ 158
1.1 SUBMITTALS ..................................................... 158 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ................................. 158 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................... 158 1.4 WARRANTY ....................................................... 159
PART 2 PRODUCTS ....................................................... 159 2.1 MANUFACTURERS .................................................. 159 2.2 GATE OPERATORS.................................................. 159
PART 3 EXECUTION ...................................................... 161
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
TOC Page xi
3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION ..................................... 161 3.2 INSTALLATION ................................................... 162 3.3 GROUNDING ...................................................... 162 3.4 PROTECTION ..................................................... 162 3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ....................................... 162
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES
SECTION 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION ........................ 163 PART 1 GENERAL ........................................................ 163
1.1 REFERENCES ..................................................... 163 1.2 DEFINITIONS .................................................... 164 ]1.03 SUBMITTALS ..................................................... 165 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE ............................................... 165
PART 2 PRODUCTS ....................................................... 166 2.1 CONDUIT, DUCTS, AND FITTINGS .................................... 166 2.2 LOW VOLTAGE INSULATED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ..................... 166 2.3 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS ....................... 167 2.4 LOW VOLTAGE SPLICES ............................................. 167 2.5 TAPE ........................................................... 168 2.6 GROUNDING AND BONDING ........................................... 168
PART 3 EXECUTION ...................................................... 168 3.1 INSTALLATION ................................................... 168 3.2 CABLE INSPECTION................................................ 168 3.3 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT ............................................. 168 3.4 CABLE PULLING ................................................... 169 3.5 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE SPLICING AND TERMINATING ...................... 170 3.6 GROUNDING SYSTEMS ............................................... 170 3.7 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING ......................... 171 3.8 CONCRETE ....................................................... 171 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ........................................... 172
DIVISION 34 - TRANSPORTATION
NOT A PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 35 - WATERWAY AND MARINE CONSTRUCTION NOT A PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS NOT A PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT NOT A PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 42 - PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND DRYING EQUIPMENT NOT A PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
TOC Page xii
DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION, AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT
NOT A PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 44 - POLLUTION AND WASTE CONTROL EQUIPMENT NOT A PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 46 - WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT NOT A PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
DIVISION 48 - ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION NOT A PART OF THESE SPECIFICATIONS
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 11 00 Page 1
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Utility Outage Requests
Utility Connection Requests
Excavation Permits
Welding/Brazing Permits
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Project Description
The work includes replacing the existing perimeter fencing and gates in accordance with UFC 4-022-03, Security Fences and Gate, as indicated on drawings, these specifications, and incidental related work.
1. Contract Line Item Number (CLIN) 1
CLIN #1: Repair- Repair items include demolition of existing fence and gates as indicated on drawings; replacement of same linear foot of demolished fencing and gate replacement to include fence grounding.
2. Contract Line Item Number (CLIN) 2
CLIN #2: Minor Construction- Minor Construction items include the remainder linear foot of new fencing and fence grounding; fence concrete mow strip; fence and gate cable reinforcement, concrete cable reinforcement deadman, concrete pavement; gate controls and electrical work.
3. Contract Line Item Number (CLIN) 3
Contract Manpower Reporting (CMRA). Provide CMRA as is specified in Section 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS.
B. Location
The work shall be located at the Combat Readiness Training Center Battlefield Airman Center (CRTC-BAC), Air to Ground Range located on
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 11 00 Page 2
Camp Shelby, MS in Perry County. The exact instructions to location will be provided by the Contracting Officer.
C. Period of Performance
Period of Performance (PoP) for this project is 110 days to begin at Notice to Proceed/Preconstruction Meeting.
D. Construction Standards
All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable codes and/or ordinances in force at the time of construction.
1.3 EXISTING WORK
Remove or alter existing work in such a manner as to prevent injury or damage to any portions of the existing work which remain.
Repair or replace portions of existing work which have been altered during construction operations to match existing or adjoining work, as approved by the Contracting Officer. At the completion of operations, existing work must be in a condition equal to or better than that which existed before new work started.
]1.04 ON-SITE PERMITS A. Utility Outage Requests and Utility Connection Requests
Schedule work to minimize outages. For utility outages and connections required during the execution of work that affect existing systems, schedule outside the regular working hours or on weekends, as approved by the Contracting Officer. Schedule utility outages and connections to minimize disruptions to the Government. No additional payment will be provided for utility outages and connections required to be performed outside the regular work hours.
Submit requests for utility outages and connections in writing to the Contracting Officer for approval at least 5 calendar days in advance of the time required.
Submit requests for electrical outages at least 10 days in advance.
In each request, state the system involved, area involved, approximate duration of outage, and the nature of work involved.
Refer to 01 35 26GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS for further requirements.
B. Excavation and Welding Permits ACTIVITY SUBMISSION DATE SUBMISSION FORM
Excavation Permits
5 calendar days prior to work AF Form 103, BCE Work Clearance Request
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 11 00 Page 3
ACTIVITY SUBMISSION DATE SUBMISSION FORM
Welding/Brazing Permits
3 calendar days prior to work CRTC Welding/Brazing Permit
Obtain a CRTC Welding/Brazing Permit from the Gulfport CRTC-BAC Fire Department (Bldg. 66) prior to any welding activity.
Burning of trash or rubbish is not permitted on Gulfport CRTC-BAC.
1.05 LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
Obtain an AF Form 103, BCE Work Clearance, prior to the start of excavation, digging work, or work that disrupts aircraft or vehicular traffic flow, base utility services, fire and intrusion alarm system, or routine activities of the Base.
The AF Form 103, BCE Work Clearance, be provided upon contract award by the Contracting Officer.
Modifications or field changes may require a revised or new AF Form 103, BCE Work Clearance, be submitted thru the course of the project.
Contractor shall call 811 for utility lines not managed, owned or maintained the Government.
Verify existing utility locations indicated on contract drawings, within area of work.
A. Notification Prior to Excavation
Notify the Contracting Officer at least 48 hours prior to starting excavation work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used.
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 14 00 Page 4
SECTION 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Entry Authorization List (Eal)
Gulfport CRTC-BAC Contractor/Subcontractor Access Affidavit Form 1.2 SPECIAL SCHEDULING REQUIREMENTS
a. The CRTC-BAC Air to Ground Range will remain in operation during the entire construction period. The Contractor must conduct his operations so as to cause the least possible interference with normal operations of the Base.
b. Permission to interrupt any road or utility service must be
requested in writing a minimum of 3 calendar days prior to the desired date of interruption.
c. The work under this contract requires special attention to the
scheduling and conduct of the work in connection with existing operations. Identify on the construction schedule each factor which constitutes a potential interruption to operations.
]1.03 CONTRACTOR ACCESS AND USE OF PREMISES A. Base Regulations
Ensure that Contractor personnel employed on the CRTC-BAC become familiar with and obey Base regulations including safety, fire, traffic and security regulations. Keep within the limits of the work and avenues of ingress and egress. Wear hard hats in designated areas. Do not enter any restricted areas unless required to do so and until cleared for such entry. Mark Contractor equipment for identification.
B. No Smoking Policy
Smoking is prohibited within and outside of all buildings on installation, except in designated smoking areas. This applies to existing buildings, buildings under construction and buildings under renovation. Discarding tobacco materials other than into designated tobacco receptacles is considered littering and is subject to fines. The Contracting Officer will identify designated smoking areas.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 14 00 Page 5
C. Project Photography
Project Photography at the CRTC-BAC will not be permitted unless specifically authorized by the Anti-Terrorism Officer (ATO).
Following explicit intent of project photograph justification and utilization. At no time will authorized photographs be permitted for use on computer websites, personal resume compilation, or publicly provided media.
D. Working Hours
Regular working hours for CRTC-BAC are 8 1/2 hour period, between 7 a.m. and 3:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, excluding Government holidays. Contractor must plan their schedule within these days/hours. Government personnel must be on site for contract work to proceed.
E. Work Outside Regular Hours
Work required outside of these days/hours must have prior approval from the Contracting Officer &/or the Contracting Officer Representative (COR) 3 calendar days prior to said work to allow for Government arrangements.
F. Occupied and Existing Building[s]
The Contractor shall be working in and around an existing building(s)which are occupied. Do not enter the building[s] without prior approval of the Contracting Officer.
G. Utility Cutovers and Interruptions
Utility cutovers and interruptions shall comply to 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK and 01 35 26GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.
a. Make utility cutovers and interruptions after normal working
hours or on Saturdays, Sundays, and Government holidays. Conform to procedures required paragraph WORK OUTSIDE REGULAR HOURS.
b. Ensure that new utility lines are complete, except for the
connection, before interrupting existing service.
c. Interruption to water, sanitary sewer, storm sewer, telephone service, electric service, air conditioning, heating, fire alarm, and compressed air are considered utility cutovers pursuant to the paragraph WORK OUTSIDE REGULAR HOURS. Such interruptions are further limited to 2 hours. This time limit includes time for deactivation and reactivation.
d. Operation of Base Utilities: The Contractor must not operate
nor disturb the setting of control devices in the station utilities system, including water, sewer, electrical, and steam services. The Government will operate the control devices as required for normal conduct of the work. The Contractor must notify the Contracting Officer giving reasonable advance notice when such operation is required.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 14 00 Page 6
1.04 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS A. Gulfport CRTC-BAC
1. Access and General Protection/Security Policy and Procedures
The contractor shall comply with all applicable installation/facility access and local security policies and procedures, which may be obtained from the Contracting Officer's Representative (COR). The contractor shall also provide all information required for background checks to meet installation access requirements to be accomplished by the local installation's Security Forces, Director of Emergency Services or local Security Office. The contractor shall ensure compliance with all personal identity verification requirements as directed by DoD, HAF and/or local policy. Should the Force Protection Condition (FPCON) change, the Government may require changes in contractor security matters or processes.
After award of contract/task order, The contractor shall provide to the COR an Entry Authorization List (EAL) and any Base specific access request documents prior to start of the project. The EAL will be provided to the contractor at time of award. The EAL is to be updated as necessary should Contractor personnel or Sub-Contractor personnel change during the course of this project; this is the responsibility of the Prime Contractor to complete and submit to the COR. The COR will submit documentation to their security officials for background clearance.
For Contractors that do not require CAC, but require access to a DoD Facility and/or Installation. Contractor and all associated sub-contractors employees shall comply with adjudication standards and procedures using the National Crime Information Center Interstate Identification Index (NCIC-III) and Terrorist Screening Database (TSDB) (AFI 31- 101 and AFI 10-245), applicable installation, facility and area commander installation/facility access and local security policies and procedures (provided by government representative), or, at OCONUS locations, in accordance with status of forces agreements and other theater regulations.
Once Contractor and all associated sub-Contractor employees are granted security clearance, completed training requirements and been issued identification badges for Base access; this identification must be worn and visible at all times in the performance of this contract/task order. When the project is complete, the Contractor POC (project supervisor) is responsible for returning all badges that have been issued for this project as part of their Close-Out
On-line training is required by each Contractor and Sub-Contract personnel requiring access to the project related Base for security clearance and Base access. This training is to be completed and completion certificates are to be submitted by the
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 14 00 Page 7
Contractor to the COR prior to receiving a contractor identification badge.
All contractor employees, to include subcontractor employees, requiring access Government Installations and Facilities shall complete AT Level I awareness training within 5 working days after contract start date or effective date of incorporation of this requirement into the contract, whichever is applicable. Certificates of completion for each affected contractor employee and subcontractor employee will be maintained by the COR or Antiterrorism Representative. AT level I Awareness Training is available at the following website: http://jko.jten.mil.
2. Contract Award
Upon award of a contract, all contractors (including Small Purchase contractors), will have background checks conducted on all employees (including subcontractors or temporary employees) requiring access to the Gulfport CRTC-BAC
The Gulfport CRTC-BAC Contractor/Subcontractor Access Affidavit Form shall be used for submitting employee personal information for background checks and may be obtained from the COR.
The contractor is responsible for providing their employees' personal information to the COR. Failure to provide all personal information required or providing fraudulent information will result in the employee's base access being denied.
The base COR sends a request, via email, to the MS CRTC/ SF. Personal employee information will be included on the Gulfport CRTC-BAC Contractor/Subcontractor Access Affidavit Form.
The Gulfport CRTC-BAC/SF will, upon receiving the Gulfport CRTC- BAC Contractor/Subcontractor Access Affidavit Form from the base COR, conduct a background check of contractor personnel using the approved local, state, and federal government databases.
Any contractor's employee found to have a criminal conviction listed below or have an outstanding warrant(s) will not be allowed entry to the base.to include, but not limited to:
US Citizenship, immigration status, or Social Security Account Number that cannot be verified.
Barred from entry/access to any military installation or facility.
Wanted by federal or civil law enforcement authorities, regardless of offense/violation.
Name appears on any federal agency's "watch list or "hit list" for criminal behavior or terrorist activity.
Any conviction of espionage, sabotage, treason, terrorism, murder.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 14 00 Page 8
Conviction of a sexual assault, armed assault/robbery, rape, child molestation or kidnapping.
Drug possession with intent to sell or drug distribution.
Upon completion of the background check, the results will be electronically mailed to the COR. The email response will state whether the applicant is approved, denied, or pending further review by Gulfport CRTC-BAC/SF. Contractor's employee(s) approved for base access will report to the Security Forces, Building 151 for issuance of their contractor identification badge.
Background checks are valid for one year unless the person is terminated from the job, or is involved in a serious offense listed above. Requests for base access exceeding the one year period will require another background check.
Every contractor's employee regardless of duration shall obtain and submit a Gulfport CRTC-BAC Contractor/Subcontractor Access Affidavit Form, have background checks conducted, and be issued a contractor identification badge.
The contractor shall maintain EAL of all employees who received a contractor identification badge for this contract. Prior to pre- final inspection, the contractor shall give the COR the the most updated version EAL of all employees who received contractor identification badges. At the final acceptance inspection or prior to contract close-out, the prime shall return all Contractor identification badges issued to the COR. The COR will verify that all contractor identification badges are returned from the EAL provided at the pre-final inspection. If all badges are not returned at the time of the final inspection or project close-out, the final payment will be withheld until either all contractor identification badges are returned or a sworn affidavit to the disposition of the badge is provided by the person who received the contractor identification badge.
3. Contractor's Entry to Gulfport CRTC-BAC
Contractor's employee(s) approved for base access will report to the Security Forces, Building 151, with COR for issuance of their contractor identification badge for the duration of the contract, not to exceed one year.
Contractor's employee(s) must possess the proper photo identification media (driver's license/state identification card, military identification card, or other authorized U.S. governmental photo media) to be issued a contractor identification badge. Non-U.S. citizens must provide original Immigrations & Naturalization Service photo media and Social Security card.
4. Contractor's Vehicle Entry onto Gulfport CRTC-BAC
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 14 00 Page 9
Operators of vehicles must provide the following documentation to register vehicles.
Valid driver's license, military identification card, and/or contractor identification badge.
Valid vehicle registration or rental agreement.
Valid insurance (except fleet vehicles) or rental agreement.
Drivers of borrowed vehicles must present a valid registration, insurance card (or policy), and power-of- attorney in the owner's name.
5. Sub-Contractors
All subcontractors are required to follow the same instructions listed above for their personnel.
6. Miscellaneous Requirements
All requests for additional contractor employees must meet the same requirements listed above, before contractor identification badges will be issued.
The Contracting Officer and COR will be notified when personnel leave the contractor company for any reason. The COR will provide that information to the Gulfport CRTC-BAC/SF to ensure that their database is updated.
The contractor is responsible for the return of all contractor identification badges at the end of the contract or when personnel depart for any reason.
During increased Force Protection Conditions (FPCONs) there may be limited entry to the installation.
Contractors ARE NOT AUTHORIZED to escort (vouch) any personnel entering the Gulfport CRTC-BAC.
For contractors requiring unescorted access to tenant units, contractor must meet the same requirements listed above, before contractor identification badges will be issued.
Any contractor found in violation of this requirement will be escorted off the installation, contractor identification badge confiscated, and not be allowed to reenter the Gulfport CRTC-BAC without the written permission of the installation commander.
Contractors are required to obey all entry requirements, traffic rules and regulations IAW AFI 31-218, Motor Vehicle Traffic Supervision. Failure to comply with requirements could result in barment from the installation.
PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 14 00 Page 10
PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 20 00.00 20 Page 11
SECTION 01 20 00.00 20 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
NGB Form 3065, Contract Progress Report; G
1.2 NGB FORM 3065, CONTRACT PROGRESS REPORT
This contract requires the use of a NGB Form 3065, Contract Progress Report, for projects with a performance period of 45 days or greater (with or without payment requests) to the Contracting Officer, who will in turn coordination with the COR for progress approval. Any discrepancies or issues will be clarified before approval. Progress Report should reflect work completed and coincide with the previously provided Progress Schedule to ensure the project is progressing as it should or to identify any potential issues.
A. NGB Form 3065, Contract Progress Report
Work elements for each Division (whether unit price or lump sum contract) such as mobilization, de-mobilization, contract finalization task which includes punch list, clean-up demolition, final construction drawings, excavation, concrete work, carpentry, engineering, installation of communication electronic facilities, etc., will be shown in logical sequence and in sufficient detail to identify the element.
The percentage of each listed work element for each Division for the complete job.
[Element of work and percentage of work element must match the AF Form 3064, Contract Progress Schedule.]
B. Real Property Assets
The Contractor shall assist the Government in completion of the Checklist for DD FORM 1354 of Installed Building Equipment items before final payment submitted and made.
1.3 CONTRACTOR'S INVOICE
The Contractor will be paid no more than once each month for percentage of work completed during the preceding month for projects with a performance period of 45 days or more. For projects of less than 45 days, partial payments will be considered on a case-by-case basis. Certified Pay Applications and Invoices will be submitted to the
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 20 00.00 20 Page 12
Contracting Officer by mail or electronic e-mail. Once reviewed and approved by the Contracting Officer, the Contractor will be instructed to submit their payment request into WAWF; instructions will be provided at task order award.
A. Content of Invoice
Each monthly invoice must include a Contractor Progress Payment Certification (AIA 702 & 703) and the coordinated progress report AF Form 3065. For projects greater than 45 it is recommended that a draft Payment Application and AF Form 3065 be submitted at the progress meetings for review and discussion; this will increase the likelihood of faster approval and payment. Once submitted into WAWF, construction payment terms are net 14.
B. Submission of Invoices
Provide the documents listed in paragraph CONTENT OF INVOICE in their entirety as attachments in Wide Area Work Flow (WAWF) for each invoice submitted. The maximum size of each WAWF attachment is two megabytes, but there are no limits on the number of attachments. If a document cannot be attached in WAWF due to system or size restriction, provide it as instructed by the Contracting Officer.
C. First Invoice
The First Payment may include cost of bonding. However, invoice from the bonding company must accompany request.
1.4 PAYMENTS FOR MATERIALS
Payment of materials may be consider in certain circumstances; refer back to the MATOC for further information. In most cases, only materials stored on Government site will be considered for payment and only with invoicing from the company that provided the materials submitted with the pay application request.
1.5 CERTIFIED PAYROLLS
The Contractor is responsible for providing weekly certified payrolls for the prime Contractor and each of the Sub-Contractors. Certified payrolls will be submitted once a month, but not held any further than the payment period for which a Contractor may be requesting. Only electronic submission is acceptable (email) Payrolls must be reviewed prior to payment being made; holding of weekly payrolls could result in payment delays due to untimely submissions.
Payrolls are to be completed as per form provided by the U.S. Department of Labor, Wage and Hour Board. It is important that the payrolls are numbered sequentially for the Prime Contractor and sequentially for the Sub-Contractor, the final payroll annotated as "Final" and any "no work" periods annotated as such with a separate certified form. The employee name, address, Labor Classification and Group Number that applies to their job classification must be clearly stated and must equal or be greater than the Wage and Determination that has been furnished for this project.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 20 00.00 20 Page 13
PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 30 00 Page 14
SECTION 01 30 00 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Letter Of Delegation; G
SF 1413, Statement Of Acknowledgment; G 1.2 MINIMUM INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
IAW FAR 52.228-5 INSURANCE - WORK ON A GOVERNMENT INSTALLATION, Contractor, upon acceptance of the task order, shall procure and maintain the following minimum amounts of insurance during the period of performance under this contract. It is important to note the insurance is required as part of the basic contract and must be in effect throughout the contract award, not just when a task order is on-going.
Workmen's Compensation $100,000
Comprehensive General Liability $500,000 per occurrence for (Bodily Injury)
Comprehensive Automobile Liability $200,000 per person and $500,000 per accident for bodily injury and $20,000 for property damage
Notification of Compliance with Insurance Requirements form letter is to be submitted with above mentioned bonds prior to TP/Pre-Construction Meeting to the Contracting Officer. The actual policy does not have to be submitted, however, be advised the Contracting Officer may request at any time.
IAW the clause titled "Insurance Work on a Government Installation", contractor shall include the substance of this clause in any sub- contract awarded under this contract. The contractor shall maintain a copy of all subcontractors' proofs of required insurance, and shall make copies available to the Contracting Officer upon request.
1.3 SUPERVISION
IAW FAR 52.236-6, Superintendence by the Contractor, the contractor shall give his personal superintendence to the work or have a competent foreman or superintendent from his/her own staff, satisfactory to the Contracting Officer, at the work site while work is in progress, with authority to act on behalf of the contractor that is capable of reading, writing, and conversing fluently in the English language.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 30 00 Page 15
Contractor shall provide to the Contracting Officer and COR a letter of delegation for the Superintendent. Letter should include task order number and project name, Superintendent's authority, point of contact information to include emergency information.
A. Superintendent Duties
The project superintendent is primarily responsible for managing and coordinating day-to-day production and schedule adherence on the project. The superintendent or qualified alternative must be on- site at all times during the performance of this contract until the work is completed and accepted.
For this project, the Superintendent shall serve as the Quality Control (QC) Manager.
B. Non-Compliance Actions
The Project Superintendent is subject to removal by the Contracting Officer for non-compliance with requirements specified in the contract and for failure to manage the project to insure timely completion. Furthermore, the Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No part of the time lost due to such stop orders is acceptable as the subject of claim for extension of time for excess costs or damages by the Contractor.
1.4 MEETINGS A. Pre-Proposal Site Visit
Purpose of meeting is to provide details, field measurements, and answer questions as related to this project. Discussion held during this meeting will not change any perimeters as they relate to this Solicitation, Statement of Work, or related drawings; but is to provide clarity and understanding of the requirement. Any changes must be issued by the contracting officer as an amendment to the solicitation.
B. Notice to Proceed (NTP)/Pre-Construction Meeting
After contract award and receipt and approval of related bonds, the Notice to Proceed/Preconstruction Meeting is held usually within 10 days of contract award. Purpose of the meeting is to officially begin the construction project and clarify administrative and technical requirements for the project.
Per the MATOC Contract and FAR Cluase, 52.211-10 COMMENCEMENT, PROSECUTION, AND COMPLETION OF WORK (APR 1984), The Contractor shall be required to:
(a) commence work on task orders issued under this contract within 10 calendar days after the date the Contractor receives the notice to proceed,
(b) prosecute the work diligently,
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 30 00 Page 16
(c) complete the entire work ready for use not later than the time designated by each task order. The time stated for completion shall include final cleanup of the premises.
C. Monthly Progress Meeting
This meeting is required for all projects where performance shall exceed 45 days. Contracting Officer will determine date of first meeting, usually within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed. However, the Prime Contractor shall chair the meeting. Contractor shall provide an agenda at minimum three (3) days prior to meeting date to all relevant parties (Contracting Officer, COR, SME, etc.). Agenda should include a summary of completed work, upcoming work, material status, questions, discussions and finally pay application submittal. Minutes should be taken and distributed within three (3) days after the meeting.
Purpose of this meeting is to review and evaluate project progress and discuss any issues, questions or uncertainties that may exist. It is also when the Contractor would submit draft copy of their pay application for review and discussion.
1.5 STATEMENT OF ACKNOWLEDGMENT
After award, the Contractor shall submit a SF 1413, Statement of Acknowledgment, for each Sub-Contractor that is to be employed for this task order and submit to the Contracting Officer and COR. This form, and a list of all employees on an Entry Authorization List (EAL), will be submitted to the Contracting Officer at the Notice to Proceed or no later than within five (10) days prior to the start of work under the task order. Notify the Contracting Office of any new Sub-Contractors by submitting a new SF 1413 or changes in employees by submitting an updated EAL, when they are added to the project.
1.6 CONTRACT MANPOWER REPORTING (CMRA)
The Contractor shall report ALL Contractor labor hours (including Sub- Contractor labor hours) required for performance of services provided under this contract/task order for the Maintenance and Repair Project, USPFO, Jackson, MS via a secure data collection site. The Contractor is required to completely fill in all required data fields using the following web address: http://www.ecmra.mil/. Reporting inputs will be for the labor executed during the period of performance during each Government fiscal year (FY), which runs October 1 through September 30. While inputs may be reported any time during the FY, all data shall be reported no later than October 31 of each calendar year, beginning with 2013 or within 30 days completion of the performance period of this contract/task order. Contractors may direct questions to the help desk at: http://www.ecmra.mil/.
A separate CLIN should be used if, the Contractor chooses to charge the Government for this extra effort in reporting. This CLIN and proposed amount (even if zero) shall be include in the proposal.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 30 00 Page 17
Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 32 53 Page 18
SECTION 01 32 53 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A. Procedure
Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified directly to the Contracting Officer.
RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response.
Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.
B. Content of the RFI
Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following:
Contract Number
Project name
Date
Name of Contractor
Name of Contracting Officer
RFI number, numbered sequentially
Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate
Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate
Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.
Contractor's signature
Any Attachments to include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.
C. RFI Format
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 32 53 Page 19
Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
AIA Document G716 may be used, if acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
D. Government's Action
The Contracting Officer will review each RFI; send to the Contracting Officer's Representative to determine what action is required; Contracting Officer's Representative will send it back to the Contracting Officer; and the Contracting Officer will return it. Allow two (2) working days for each process for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.
Contracting Officer's Representative's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Contracting Officer's Representative’s time for response will start again.
Contracting Officer's Representative's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to contract requirements.
1. Government's Rejection
The following RFIs will be returned without action
Requests for approval of submittals
Requests for approval of substitutions.
Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.
Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.
Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.
Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.
E. Contractor's Action
On receipt of Contracting Officer's Representative's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify the Contracting Officer within two (2) days if Contractor disagrees with response.
If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify the Contracting Officer in writing within 2 days of receipt of the RFI response.
F. RFI Log
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 32 53 Page 20
Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number, if required by the Contracting Officer. Submit log every two (2) weeks. Form to include the following information:
Contract Number.
Project name.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of Contracting Officer.
RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.
RFI description.
Date the RFI was submitted.
Date Contracting Officer's response was received.
Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction
Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 33 00 Page 21
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY
The Contracting Officer may request submittals in addition to those specified when deemed necessary to adequately describe the work covered in the respective sections.
Units of weights and measures used on all submittals are to be the same as those used in the contract drawings.
Each submittal is to be complete and in sufficient detail to allow ready determination of compliance with contract requirements.
Submittals requiring Government approval are to be submitted and approved prior to the acquisition of the material or equipment covered thereby. Pick up and dispose of samples not incorporated into the work in accordance with manufacturer's Safety Data Sheets (SDS) and in compliance with existing laws and regulations.
A submittal register showing items of equipment and materials for when submittals are required by the specifications is provided.
1.2 SUBMITTAL DESCRIPTIONS
Submittals requirements are specified in the technical sections. Submittals are identified by Submittal Description (SD) numbers and titles as follows:
A. SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Submittals which are required prior to [issuance of contract notice to proceed.
B. SD-02 Shop Drawings
Drawings, diagrams and schedules specifically prepared to illustrate some portion of the work.
Diagrams and instructions from a manufacturer or fabricator for use in producing the product and as aids to the Contractor for integrating the product or system into the project.
C. SD-03 Product Data
Catalog cuts, illustrations, schedules, diagrams, performance charts, instructions and brochures illustrating size, physical appearance and other characteristics of materials, systems or equipment for some portion of the work.
D. SD-04 Samples
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 33 00 Page 22
Fabricated or un-fabricated physical examples of materials, equipment or workmanship that illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of a material or product and establish standards by which the work can be judged.
Color samples from the manufacturer's standard line (or custom color samples if specified) to be used in selecting or approving colors for the project.
E. SD-05 Design Data
Design calculations, mix designs, analyses or other data pertaining to a part of work.
F. SD-06 Test Reports
Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that a material, product or system identical to the material, product or system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified requirements. Unless specified in another section, testing must have been within three years of date of contract award for the project.
Report which includes findings of a test required to be performed by the Contractor on an actual portion of the work or prototype prepared for the project before shipment to job site.
G. SD-07 Certificates
Statements printed on the manufacturer's letterhead and signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material attesting that the product, system, or material meets specification requirements. Must be dated after award of project contract and clearly name the project
Document required of Contractor, or of a manufacturer, supplier, installer or Subcontractor through Contractor. The document purpose is to further promote the orderly progression of a portion of the work by documenting procedures, acceptability of methods, or personnel qualifications.
H. SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Preprinted material describing installation of a product, system or material, including special notices and (SDS) concerning impedances, hazards and safety precautions.
I. SD-09 Manufacturer's Field Reports
Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer's representative at the job site, in the vicinity of the job site, or on a sample taken from the job site, on a portion of the work, during or after installation, to confirm compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions. The documentation must be signed by an authorized official of a testing laboratory or agency and state the test results; and indicate whether the material, product, or system has passed or failed the test.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 33 00 Page 23
J. SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Data that is furnished by the manufacturer, or the system provider, to the equipment operating and maintenance personnel, including manufacturer's help and product line documentation necessary to maintain and install equipment. This data is needed by operating and maintenance personnel for the safe and efficient operation, maintenance and repair of the item.
K. SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Documentation to record compliance with technical or administrative requirements or to establish an administrative mechanism.
Special requirements necessary to properly close out a construction contract. For example, Record Drawings and as-built drawings. Also, submittal requirements necessary to properly close out a major phase of construction on a multi-phase contract. Closeout submittals include, but are not limited to:
Letters of Completion/Acceptance
Warranty letter
Release of Claim
Release of Liens
As-Builts & O&M Manuals
DD 1354 Checklist
Outstanding Certified Payrolls
Proof of CMRA Reporting
Sworn Affidavit of Lost Security Badge
Final Pay Application
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor QC approval. Submit the following in accordance with this section.
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Submittal Register; G
1.4 SUBMITTAL CLASSIFICATION
Submittals are classified as follows: A. Government Approved (G)
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 33 00 Page 24
Government approval is required for extensions of design, critical materials, deviations, equipment whose compatibility with the entire system must be checked, and other items as designated by the Contracting Officer. Within the terms of the Contract Clause SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS FOR CONSTRUCTION, they are considered to be "shop drawings."
B. Contractor QC Approval
Submittals not requiring Government approval will be for Contractor QC Approval.
1.5 FORWARDING SUBMITTALS REQUIRING GOVERNMENT APPROVAL
As soon as practicable after award of contract, and before procurement or fabrication, forward to the Contracting Officer and COR submittals required in the technical sections of this specification, including shop drawings, product data and samples. Forward one copy of the transmittal form for all submittals to the Contracting Officer and COR.
COR will review, verify submittals comply with the contract requirements, and recommend approval to the Contracting Officer those submittals requiring Contracting Officer approval.
1.6 PREPARATION
Use the AF Form 3000, Material Approval Submittal for submitting both Government approved and Contractor QC submittals in accordance with the instructions on the reverse side of the form. This form will be furnished to the Contractor. Properly complete this form by filling out all the heading blank spaces and identifying each item submitted. Exercise special care to ensure proper listing of the specification paragraph and sheet number of the contract drawings pertinent to the data submitted for each item.
"Government Approval Required" or "Contractor QC Approval" shall be
clearly marked on the AF Form 3000, Material Approval Submittal. Government Approval Required and For Information Only submittals shall not use the same AF Form 3000, Material Approval Submittal.
1.7 ELETRONIC FILE FORMAT
Provide submittals in electronic format, with the exception of material samples required for SD-04 Samples items. Compile the submittal file as a single, complete document, to include the Transmittal Form described within. Name the electronic submittal file specifically according to its contents, coordinate the file naming convention with the Contracting Officer. Electronic files must be of sufficient quality that all information is legible. Use PDF as the electronic format, unless otherwise specified or directed by the Contracting Officer. Generate PDF files from original documents with bookmarks so that the text included in the PDF file is both searchable and can be copied. If documents are scanned, Optical Character Resolution (OCR) routines are required. Index and bookmark files exceeding 30 pages to allow efficient navigation of the file. When required, the electronic file must include a valid electronic signature, or scan of a signature.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 33 00 Page 25
Email electronic submittal documents fewer than 10MB to an email address as directed by the Contracting Officer. Provide electronic documents over 10MB on an optical disc, or through an electronic file sharing system such as the AMRDEC SAFE Web Application located at the following website: https://safe.amrdec.army.mil/safe/.
Provide hard copies of submittals when requested by the Contracting Officer. Up to 2 additional hard copies of any submittal may be requested at the discretion of the Contracting Officer, at no additional cost to the Government.
1.8 CONTRACTOR QC APPROVAL
Normally submittals for Contractor QC Approval will not be returned. Approval of the Contracting Officer is not required on Contractor QC Approval submittals. The Government reserves the right to require the Contractor to resubmit any item found not to comply with the contract. This does not relieve the Contractor from the obligation to furnish material conforming to the plans and specifications; will not prevent the Contracting Officer from requiring removal and replacement of nonconforming material incorporated in the work; and does not relieve the Contractor of the requirement to furnish samples for testing by the Government laboratory or for check testing by the Government in those instances where the technical specifications so prescribe.
1.9 SUBMITTAL REGISTER
Prepare and maintain submittal register, as the work progresses. Use electronic submittal register program furnished by the Government or any other format. Do not change data which is output in columns (c), (d), (e), and (f) as delivered by Government; retain data which is output in columns (a), (g), (h), and (i) as approved. A submittal register showing items of equipment and materials for which submittals are required by the specifications is provided as an attachment. This list may not be all inclusive and additional submittals may be required. The Government will provide the initial submittal register in electronic format with the following fields completed, to the extent that will be required by the Government during subsequent usage.
Column (c): Lists specification section in which submittal is required.
Column (d): Lists each submittal description (SD No. and type, e.g. SD-02 Shop Drawings) required in each specification section.
Column (e): Lists one principal paragraph in specification section where a material or product is specified. This listing is only to facilitate locating submitted requirements. Do not consider entries in column (e) as limiting project requirements.
Column (f): Indicate approving authority for each submittal.
Thereafter, the Contractor is to track all submittals by maintaining a complete list, including completion of all data columns, including dates on which submittals are received and returned by the Government.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 33 00 Page 26
1.10 VARIATIONS/SUBSTITUTIONS
Variation/Substitutions from contract requirements require both Designer of Record (DOR) and Government approval pursuant to contract Clause FAR 52.236-21 and will be considered where advantageous to Government.
A. Considering Variations/Substitutions
Discussion with Contracting Officer prior to submission, after consulting with the DOR, will help ensure functional and quality requirements are met and minimize rejections and re-submittals.
Specifically point out variations from contract requirements in transmittal letters. Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government requiring rejection and removal of such work at no additional cost to the Government.
B. Proposing Variations/Substitutions
When proposing variations/substitutions, deliver written request using the Substitution Request Form to the Contracting Officer, with documentation of the nature and features of the variation and why the variation is desirable and beneficial to Government, including the DOR's written analysis and approval. If lower cost is a benefit, also include an estimate of the cost savings. In addition to documentation required for variation, include the submittals required for the item. Clearly mark the proposed variation in all documentation.
C. Warranting that Variations/Substitutions are Compatible
When delivering a variation/substitutions for approval, Contractor, including its Designer(s) of Record, warrants that this contract has been reviewed to establish that the variation, if incorporated, will be compatible with other elements of work.
D. Review Schedule Extension
In addition to normal submittal review period, a period of 10 working days will be allowed for consideration by the Government of submittals with variations.
1.11 DISAPPROVED OR REJECTED SUBMITTALS
Make corrections required by the Contracting Officer. If the Contractor considers any correction or notation on the returned submittals to constitute a change to the contract drawings or specifications; notice as required under the FAR clause entitled CHANGES, is to be given to the Contracting Officer. Contractor is responsible for the dimensions and design of connection details and construction of work. Failure to point out deviations may result in the Government requiring rejection and removal of such work at the Contractor's expense.
If changes are necessary to submittals, make such revisions and submission of the submittals in accordance with the procedures above. No item of work requiring a submittal change is to be accomplished until the changed submittals are approved.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 33 00 Page 27
1.12 APPROVED/ACCEPTED SUBMITTALS
The Contracting Officer's approval or acceptance of submittals is not to be construed as a complete check, and indicates only that the general method of construction, materials, detailing and other information are satisfactory.
Approval or acceptance will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for any error which may exist, as the Contractor under the Contractor Quality Control (CQC) requirements of this contract is responsible for dimensions, the design of adequate connections and details, and the satisfactory construction of all work.
After submittals have been approved or accepted by the Contracting Officer, no resubmittal for the purpose of substituting materials or equipment will be considered unless accompanied by an explanation of why a substitution is necessary.
PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 35 26 Page 28
SECTION 01 35 26 GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)
ASSE/SAFE A10.44 (2014) Control of Energy Sources
(Lockout/Tagout) for Construction and Demolition Operations
ASSE/SAFE Z244.1 (2003; R 2014) Control of Hazardous
Energy Lockout/Tagout and Alternative Methods
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM F855 (2015) Standard Specifications for
Temporary Protective Grounds to Be Used on De-energized Electric Power Lines and Equipment
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 1048 (2003) Guide for Protective Grounding of
Power Lines
IEEE C2 (2017; Errata 1 2017) National Electrical Safety Code
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 241 (2013; Errata 2015) Standard for
Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations
NFPA 51B (2014) Standard for Fire Prevention
During Welding, Cutting, and Other Hot Work
NFPA 70 (2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-
2) National Electrical Code
NFPA 70E (2015; ERTA 1 2015) Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements
Manual
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 35 26 Page 29
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
29 CFR 1910.147 Control of Hazardous Energy (Lock Out/Tag Out)
29 CFR 1910.333 Selection and Use of Work Practices
29 CFR 1915.89 Control of Hazardous Energy
(Lockout/Tags-Plus) 1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
AF Form 269, Electrical Facilities Safe Clearance Form
CE Form 1259, Safe Clearance Activity Hazard Analysis
Arc Flash Energized Electrical Work Assessment
SD-06 Test Reports
Notifications and Reports (as required)
Accident Reports; G (as required)
1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
In addition to the detailed requirements included in the provisions of this contract, comply with the most recent edition of USACE EM 385-1-1, and the following federal, state, and local laws, ordinances, criteria, rules and regulations. Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the appropriate administrative agency for resolution before starting work. Where the requirements of this specification, applicable laws, criteria, ordinances, regulations, and referenced documents vary, the most stringent requirements govern. Details of the Safety and Health Requirements Manual can be found at: http://www.usace.army.mil/SafetyandOccupationalHealth/SafetyandHealthReq uirementsManual.aspx.
1.4 SITE SAFETY ANFD HEALTH OFFICER (SSHO)
The SSHO may also serve as the Quality Control Manager and as the Superintendent.
1.5 DISPLAY OF SAFETY INFORMATION
Within 10 days after Notice to Proceed and/or prior to commencement of work, erect a safety bulletin board at the job site. Where size, duration, or logistics of project do not facilitate a bulletin board, an alternative method, acceptable to the Contracting Officer, that is
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 35 26 Page 30
accessible and includes all mandatory information for employee and visitor review, may be deemed as meeting the requirement for a bulletin board. Include and maintain information on safety bulletin board as required by EM 385-1-1, Section 01.A.07.
1.6 EMERGENCY MEDICAL TREATMENT
Contractors must arrange for their own emergency medical treatment. Government has no responsibility to provide emergency medical treatment.
1.7 NOTIFICATIONS and REPORTS A. Mishap Notification
Notify the Contracting Officer, COR, and on-site Government personnel/security as soon as practical, but no more than four hours after any accident meeting the definition of Recordable Injuries or Illnesses or High Visibility Accidents, property damage equal to or greater than $2,000, or any weight handling equipment accident.
B. Accident Reports
a. Conduct an accident investigation for recordable injuries and illnesses, property damage, and near misses as defined in EM 385- 1-1, to establish the root cause(s) of the accident. Complete the applicable AF Form 711B, and provide the report to the Contracting Officer within 5 calendar day(s) of the accident. The Contracting Officer will provide copies of any required or special forms.
1.8 HOT WORK
Submit and obtain a written permit prior to performing "Hot Work" (i.e. welding or cutting) or operating other flame-producing/spark producing devices, from the Gulfport CRTC-BAC/ Fire Department. CONTRACTORS ARE REQUIRED TO MEET ALL CRITERIA BEFORE A PERMIT IS ISSUED. Provide at least two 20 pound 4A:20 BC rated extinguishers for normal "Hot Work". The extinguishers must be current inspection tagged, and contain an approved safety pin and tamper resistant seal. It is also mandatory to have a designated FIRE WATCH for any "Hot Work" done at this activity. The Fire Watch must be trained in accordance with NFPA 51B and remain on-site for a minimum of one hour after completion of the task or as specified on the hot work permit.
1.9 HAZARDOUS ENERGY CONTROL PROGRAM (HECP) REQUIREMENTS
Hazardous Energy Control must comply with EM 385-1-1 Section 12, 29 CFR 1910.147, 29 CFR 1910.333, 29 CFR 1915.89, ASSE/SAFE Z244.1, and ASSE/SAFE A10.44.
1.10 SEVERE STORM REQUIREMENTS
In the event of a severe storm warning, the Contractor must:
a. Secure outside equipment and materials and place materials that could be damaged in protected areas.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 35 26 Page 31
b. Check surrounding area, including roof, for loose material, equipment, debris, and other objects that could be blown away or against existing facilities.
c. Ensure that temporary erosion controls are adequate.
PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 CONSTRUCTION AND OTHER WORK A. GENERAL
Comply with EM 385-1-1, NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NFPA 241, Federal and State OSHA regulations, and other related submittals and activity fire and safety regulations. The most stringent standard prevails.
PPE is governed in all areas by the nature of the work the employee is performing. Use personal hearing protection at all times in designated noise hazardous areas or when performing noise hazardous tasks. Safety glasses must be worn or carried/available on each person. Mandatory PPE includes:
a. Hard Hat
b. Long Pants
c. Appropriate Safety Shoes
d. Appropriate Class Reflective Vests
B. Hazardous Material Use
Each hazardous material must receive approval from the Contracting Office or their designated representative prior to being brought onto the job site or prior to any other use in connection with this contract. Allow a minimum of 10 working days for processing of the request for use of a hazardous material. Refer to 01 57 19TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS for submittal requirements.
C. Unforeseen Hazardous Material
Contract documents identify materials such as PCB, lead paint, and friable and non-friable asbestos and other OSHA regulated chemicals (i.e. 29 CFR Part 1910.1000). If material(s) that may be hazardous to human health upon disturbance are encountered during construction operations, stop that portion of work and notify the Contracting Officer immediately. Within 14 calendar days the Government will determine if the material is hazardous. If material is not hazardous or poses no danger, the Government will direct the Contractor to proceed without change. If material is hazardous and handling of the material is necessary to accomplish the work, the Government will issue a modification pursuant to FAR 52.243-4, "Changes" and FAR 52.236-2, "Differing Site Conditions."
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 35 26 Page 32
3.2 PRE-OUTAGE COORDINATION MEETING
Apply at least 5 working days in advance for non-electrical utility outages and 10 working days for electrical outages. As a minimum, the request must include the location of the outage, utilities being affected, duration of outage and any necessary sketches. Once approved, and prior to beginning work on the utility system requiring shut down, attend a pre-outage coordination meeting with the Contracting Officer and the COR to review the scope of work and the lock-out/tag-out procedures for worker protection. No work will be performed on energized electrical circuits unless proof is provided that no other means exist and an.
3.3 CONTROL OF HAZARDOUS ENERGY (LOCKOUT/TAGOUT)
Provide and operate a Hazardous Energy Control Program (HECP) in accordance with EM 385-1-1 Section 12, 29 CFR 1910.333, and 29 CFR 1915.89.
The contractor shall prepare and submit an AF Form 269, Electrical Facilities Safe Clearance Form and a CE Form 1259, Safe Clearance Activity Hazard Analysis.
3.4 EQUIPMENT A. Material Handling Equipment (MHE)
a. Material handling equipment such as forklifts must not be modified with work platform attachments for supporting employees unless specifically delineated in the manufacturer's printed operating instructions. Material handling equipment fitted with personnel work platform attachments are prohibited from traveling or positioning while personnel are working on the platform.
B. Use of Explosives
Explosives shall not be used or brought to the Gulfport CRTC-BAC. 3.5 ELECTRICAL
Perform electrical work in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Appendix A, Sections 11 and 12.
A. Conduct of Electrical Work
As delineated in EM 385-1-1, electrical work is to be conducted in a de-energized state unless there is no alternative method for accomplishing the work. In those cases obtain an energized work permit, Arc Flash Energized Electrical Work Assessment) from the Contracting Officer. The energized work permit application must be accompanied by the AHA and a summary of why the equipment/circuit needs to be worked energized. Underground electrical spaces must be certified safe for entry before entering to conduct work. Cables that will be cut must be positively identified and de-energized prior to performing each cut. Attach temporary grounds in accordance with ASTM F855 and IEEE 1048. Perform all high voltage
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 35 26 Page 33
cable cutting remotely using hydraulic cutting tool. When racking in or live switching of circuit breakers, no additional person other than the switch operator is allowed in the space during the actual operation. Plan so that work near energized parts is minimized to the fullest extent possible. Use of electrical outages clear of any energized electrical sources is the preferred method.
B. Qualifications
Electrical work must be performed by personnel with verifiable credentials who are familiar with applicable code requirements. Verifiable credentials consist of State, National and Local Certifications or Licenses that a Master or Journeyman Electrician may hold, depending on work being performed, and must be identified in the appropriate AHA. Journeyman/Apprentice ratio must be in accordance with State, Local requirements applicable to where work is being performed.
C. Arc Flash
Conduct a hazard analysis/arc flash hazard analysis whenever work on or near energized parts greater than 50 volts is necessary, in accordance with NFPA 70E.
All personnel entering the identified arc flash protection boundary must be properly trained in NFPA 70E requirements and procedures. Unless permitted by NFPA 70E, no Unqualified Person is permitted to approach nearer than the Limited Approach Boundary of energized conductors and circuit parts. Training must be administered by an electrically qualified source and documented.
D. Grounding
Ground electrical circuits, equipment and enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 to provide a permanent, continuous and effective path to ground unless otherwise noted by EM 385-1-1.
Check grounding circuits to ensure that the circuit between the ground and a grounded power conductor has a resistance low enough to permit sufficient current flow to allow the fuse or circuit breaker to interrupt the current.
E. Testing
Temporary electrical distribution systems and devices must be inspected, tested and found acceptable for Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) protection, polarity, ground continuity, and ground resistance before initial use, before use after modification and at least monthly. Monthly inspections and tests must be maintained for each temporary electrical distribution system.
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 42 00 Page 34
SECTION 01 42 00 SOURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
Various publications are referenced in other sections of the specifications to establish requirements for the work. These references are identified in each section by document number, date and title. The document number used in the citation is the number assigned by the standards producing organization (e.g. ASTM B564 Standard Specification for Nickel Alloy Forgings). However, when the standards producing organization has not assigned a number to a document, an identifying number has been assigned for reference purposes.
1.2 ORDERING INFORMATION
The addresses of the standards publishing organizations whose documents are referenced in other sections of these specifications are listed below, and if the source of the publications is different from the address of the sponsoring organization, that information is also provided.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO) 444 North Capital Street, NW, Suite 249 Washington, DC 20001 Ph: 202-624-5800 Fax: 202-624-5806 E-Mail: info@aashto.org Internet: http://www.aashto.org
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI) 38800 Country Club Drive Farmington Hills, MI 48331-3439 Ph: 248-848-3700 Fax: 248-848-3701 E-mail: bkstore@concrete.org Internet: http://www.concrete.org
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) 1899 L Street, NW,11th Floor Washington, DC 20036 Ph: 202-293-8020 Fax: 202-293-9287 E-mail: storemanager@ansi.org Internet: http://www.ansi.org/
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)
1800 East Oakton Street Des Plaines, IL 60018 Ph: 847-699-2929 Internet: http://www.asse.org
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 42 00 Page 35
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA) 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235-3098 Ph: 303-794-7711 E-mail: distribution@awwa.org Internet: http://www.awwa.org
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM) 100 Barr Harbor Drive, P.O. Box C700 West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959 Ph: 877-909-2786 Internet: http://www.astm.org
GREEN SEAL (GS) 1001 Connecticut Avenue, NW Suite 827 Washington, DC 20036-5525 Ph: 202-872-6400 Fax: 202-872-4324 Internet: http://www.greenseal.org
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE) 445 and 501 Hoes Lane Piscataway, NJ 08854-4141 Ph: 732-981-0060 or 800-701-4333 Fax: 732-562-9667 E-mail: onlinesupport@ieee.org Internet: http://www.ieee.org
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA) 3050 Old Centre Ave. Suite 102 Portage, MI 49024 Ph: 269-488-6382 Internet: http://www.netaworld.org
MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI) 2800 Ingleton Avenue Burnaby, BC CANADA V5C 6G7 Ph: 1-888-674-8937 Fax: 1-888-211-8708 E-mail: info@paintinfo.com or techservices@mpi.net Internet: http://www.mpi.net/
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA) 1300 North 17th Street, Suite 900 Arlington, VA 22209 Ph: 703-841-3200 Internet: http://www.nema.org/
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) 1 Batterymarch Park Quincy, MA 02169-7471 Ph: 617-770-3000 Fax: 617-770-0700 Internet: http://www.nfpa.org
SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 42 00 Page 36
40 24th Street, 6th Floor Pittsburgh, PA 15222 Ph: 412-281-2331 Fax: 412-281-9992 E-mail: info@sspc.org Internet: http://www.sspc.org
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE) CRD-C DOCUMENTS available on Internet: http://www.wbdg.org/ccb/browse_cat.php?c=68 Order Other Documents from: USACE Publications Depot Attn: CEHEC-IM-PD 2803 52nd Avenue Hyattsville, MD 20781-1102 Ph: 301-394-0081 Fax: 301-394-0084 E-mail: pubs-army@usace.army.mil Internet: http://www.publications.usace.army.mil/
or http://www.hnc.usace.army.mil/Missions/Engineering/TECHINFO.aspx
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD) Order DOD Documents from: Room 3A750-The Pentagon 1400 Defense Pentagon Washington, DC 20301-1400 Ph: 703-571-3343 FAX: 215-697-1462 E-mail: customerservice@ntis.gov Internet: http://www.ntis.gov Obtain Military Specifications, Standards and Related Publications from: Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System (ASSIST) Department of Defense Single Stock Point (DODSSP) Document Automation and Production Service (DAPS) Building 4/D 700 Robbins Avenue Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094 Ph: 215-697-6396 - for account/password issues Internet: http://assist.daps.dla.mil/online/start/; account registration required Obtain Unified Facilities Criteria (UFC) from: Whole Building Design Guide (WBDG) National Institute of Building Sciences (NIBS) 1090 Vermont Avenue NW, Suite 700 Washington, CD 20005 Ph: 202-289-7800 Fax: 202-289-1092 Internet: http://www.wbdg.org/references/docs_refs.php
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA) Ariel Rios Building 1200 Pennsylvania Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20004 Ph: 202-272-0167
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 42 00 Page 37
Internet: http://www2.epa.gov/libraries --- Some EPA documents are available only from: National Technical Information Service (NTIS) 5301 Shawnee Road Alexandria, VA 22312 Ph: 703-605-6050 or 1-688-584-8332 Fax: 703-605-6900 E-mail: info@ntis.gov Internet: http://www.ntis.gov
U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA) Order for sale documents from: Superintendent of Documents U.S. Government Printing Office (GPO) 710 North Capitol Street, NW Washington, DC 20401 Ph: 202-512-1800 Fax: 202-512-2104 E-mail: contactcenter@gpo.gov Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov Order free documents from: Federal Aviation Administration Department of Transportation 800 Independence Avenue, SW Washington, DC 20591 Ph: 1-866-835-5322 Internet: http://www.faa.gov
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA) 8601 Adelphi Road College Park, MD 20740-6001 Ph: 866-272-6272 Fax: 301-837-0483 Internet: http://www.archives.gov Order documents from: Superintendent of Documents U.S.Government Printing Office (GPO) 710 North Capitol Street, NW Washington, DC 20401 Ph: 202-512-1800 Fax: 202-512-2104 E-mail: contactcenter@gpo.gov Internet: http://www.gpoaccess.gov
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL) 2600 N.W. Lake Road Camas, WA 98607-8542 Ph: 877-854-3577 E-mail: CEC.us@us.ul.com Internet: http://www.ul.com/ UL Directories available through IHS at http://www.ihs.com
PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 42 00 Page 38
PART 3 EXECUTION Not used
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 45 00.10 20 Page 39
SECTION 01 45 00.10 20 QUALITY CONTROL FOR MINOR CONSTRUCTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 QC PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
Establish and maintain a QC program as described in the original MATOC Contract submission. The QC program shall consists of a QC Manager, a QC plan, a Coordination and Mutual Understanding Meeting, QC meetings, three phases of control, submittal review and approval, testing, and QC certifications and documentation necessary to provide materials, equipment, workmanship, fabrication, construction and operations which comply with the requirements of this contract. The QC program shall cover on-site and off-site work and shall be keyed to the work sequence.
The Contracting Officer reserves the right to require changes in the QC plan and operations as necessary, including removal of personnel, to ensure the specified quality of work. The Contracting Officer reserves the right to interview any member of the QC organization at any time in order to verify the submitted qualifications.
Notify the Contracting Officer, in writing, of any proposed change, including changes in the QC organization personnel, a minimum of seven calendar days prior to a proposed change. Proposed changes shall be subject to the acceptance by the Contracting Officer.
Inspections and tests are for the sole benefit of the Government and shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of providing quality control measures to ensure that the work strictly complies with the task order requirements. No inspection or test by the Government shall be construed as constituting or implying acceptance. Wherever testing or analysis of material is required, such testing will be made at the Contractor's expense, unless otherwise noted. The Contractor, at no cost to the Government, will accomplish subsequent testing of materials that fail to meet specifications.
1.2 TESTING LABORATORY REQUIREMENTS
Except as stated otherwise in the specification sections, perform sampling and testing required under this contract.
All sampling and testing must be performed by an approved, off-site,
independent, accredited laboratory. A. Accreditation Requirements
Construction materials testing laboratories must be accredited by a laboratory accreditation authority and will be required to submit a copy of the Certificate of Accreditation and Scope of Accreditation. The laboratory's scope of accreditation must include the appropriate ASTM standards (i.e.; E 329, C 1077, D 3666, D 3740, A 880, E 543) listed in the technical sections of the specifications. Laboratories engaged in Hazardous Materials Testing shall meet the requirements of OSHA and EPA. The policy applies to the specific
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 45 00.10 20 Page 40
laboratory performing the actual testing, not just the "Corporate Office."
B. Laboratory Accreditation Authorities
Laboratory Accreditation Authorities include the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) administered by the National Institute of Standards and Technology, the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), International Accreditation Services, Inc. (IAS), U. S. Army Corps of Engineers Materials Testing Center (MTC), and the American Association for Laboratory Accreditation (A2LA).
C. Capability Check
The KO retains the right to check laboratory equipment in the proposed laboratory and the laboratory technician's testing procedures, techniques, and other items pertinent to testing, for compliance with the standards set forth in this contract.
D. Test Results
Cite applicable Contract requirements, tests or analytical procedures used. Provide actual results and include a statement that the item tested or analyzed conforms or fails to conform to specified requirements. If the item fails to conform, notify the KO immediately. Conspicuously stamp the cover sheet for each report in large red letters "CONFORMS" or "DOES NOT CONFORM" to the specification requirements, whichever is applicable. Test results shall be signed by a testing laboratory representative authorized to sign certified test reports. Furnish the signed reports, certifications, and other documentation to the Contracting Officer.
1.3 COMPLETION INSPECTIONS A. Punch-Out Inspection
Near the completion of all work or any increment thereof established by a completion time stated in the Contract clause "Commencement, Prosecution, and Completion of Work," or stated elsewhere in the specifications, the Contractor shall conduct an inspection of the work and develop a punch list of items which do not conform to the approved drawings and specifications. Include in the punch list any remaining items of the "Rework Items List", which were not corrected prior to the Punch-Out inspection. The punch list shall include the estimated date by which the deficiencies will be corrected. A copy of the punch list shall be provided to the Contracting Officer. The Contractor shall make follow-on inspections to ascertain that all deficiencies have been corrected. Once this is accomplished, the Contractor shall notify the Government that the facility is ready for the Government "Pre-Final Inspection".
B. Pre-Final Inspection
The Government and the Contractor will perform this inspection to verify that the facility is complete and ready to be occupied. The Contractor shall provide a list of contractor personnel, to include
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 45 00.10 20 Page 41
sub-contractor personnel, that were issued a security badge. A Government pre-final punch list may be developed as a result of this inspection. The Contractor shall ensure that all items on this list are corrected prior to notifying the Government that a "Final" inspection with the customer can be scheduled. Any items noted on the "Pre-Final" inspection shall be corrected in a timely manner and shall be accomplished before the contract completion date for the work or any particular increment thereof if the project is divided into increments by separate completion dates.
The Contractor shall accompany the Bio-environmental Engineering Representative (BEE), Environmental Officer and the Contracting Officer's Technical Representative(COTR) on project's pre-final inspection to ensure all used/unused HM is removed from the installation.
C. Final Acceptance Inspection
The Contractor and the Contracting Officer will be in attendance at this inspection. Additional Government personnel may be in attendance. The final acceptance inspection will be formally scheduled by the Contractor based upon results of the "Pre-Final Inspection". Notice shall be given to the Contracting Officer at least 5 days prior to the final inspection. The notice shall state that all specific items previously identified to the Contractor as being unacceptable will be complete by the date scheduled for the final acceptance inspection.
Contractor shall return all security badges issued to all contractor personnel, to include sub-contractor personnel at the pre-final inspection.
The Contracting Officer or representative will verify that all badges are returned from the list provided at the pre-final inspection. If all badges are not returned at the time of the final inspection, the final payment will be withheld until either all badges are returned or a sworn affidavit to the disposition of the badge is provided by the person who received the badge.
1.4 DOCUMENTATION
Maintain current and complete records of on-site and off-site construction operations and activities. Records are required for each day work is performed. Account for each calendar day throughout the life of the contract. The superintendent must prepare and sign the Contractor Production Records. The record(s)shall contain pertinent information including directions received, problems encountered during construction, work progress and delays, conflicts or errors in the drawings or specifications, field changes, safety hazards encountered, instructions given and corrective actions taken, delays encountered and a record of visitors to the work site.
1.5 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
The Contractor is required to review the as-built drawings, required by Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS, are kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations, which have been made from the Contract
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 45 00.10 20 Page 42
drawings. Ensure each deviation has been identified with the appropriate modifying documentation, e.g. PC number, modification number, RFI number, etc. Upon completion of work, the Contractor shall submit the as-built drawings to the Contracting Officer.
1.6 NOTIFICATION ON NON-COMPLIANCE
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor of any detected non- compliance with the foregoing requirements. The Contractor shall take immediate corrective action. If the contractor fails or refuses to correct the non-compliant work, the Contracting Officer will issue a non compliance notice. Such notice, when delivered to the Contractor at the work site, shall be deemed sufficient for the purpose of notification. If the Contractor fails or refuses to comply promptly, the Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The Contractor shall make no part of the time lost due to such stop orders the subject of claim for extension of time, for excess costs, or damages.
PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 50 00 Page 43
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 241 (2013; Errata 2015) Standard for
Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations
NFPA 70 (2017; ERTA 1-2 2017; TIA 17-1; TIA 17-
2) National Electrical Code
U.S. FEDERAL AVIATION ADMINISTRATION (FAA)
FAA AC 70/7460-1 (2015; Rev L) Obstruction Marking and Lighting
1.2 HURRICANE CONDITION OF READINESS
Unless directed otherwise, comply with:
a. Condition FOUR (Sustained winds of 50 knots or greater expected within 72 hours): Normal daily jobsite cleanup and good housekeeping practices. Collect and store in piles or containers scrap lumber, waste material, and rubbish for removal and disposal at the close of each work day. Maintain the construction site including storage areas, free of accumulation of debris. Stack form lumber in neat piles less than 4 feet high. Remove all debris, trash, or objects that could become missile hazards. [Contact Contracting Officer for weather and Condition of Readiness (COR) updates and completion of required actions.
b. Condition THREE (Sustained winds of 50 knots or greater expected
within 48 hours): Maintain "Condition FOUR" requirements and commence securing operations necessary for "Condition ONE" which cannot be completed within 18 hours. Cease all routine activities which might interfere with securing operations. Commence securing and stow all gear and portable equipment. Make preparations for securing buildings. Review requirements pertaining to "Condition TWO" and continue action as necessary to attain "Condition THREE" readiness. Contact Contracting Officer for weather and COR updates and completion of required actions.
c. Condition TWO (Sustained winds of 50 knots or greater expected
within 24 hours): Curtail or cease routine activities until securing operation is complete. Reinforce or remove form work and scaffolding. Secure machinery, tools, equipment, materials, or
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 50 00 Page 44
remove from the jobsite. Expend every effort to clear all missile hazards and loose equipment from general base areas. Contact Contracting Officer for weather and Condition of Readiness (COR) updates and completion of required actions.
d. Condition ONE. (Sustained winds of 50 knots or greater expected
within 12 hours): Secure the jobsite, and leave Government premises.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 TEMPORARY SIGNAGE
Immediately upon beginning of work, provide a weatherproof glass-covered bulletin board not less than 36 by 48 inches in size for displaying the Equal Employment Opportunity poster, a copy of the wage decision contained in the contract, Wage Rate Information poster, and other information approved by the Contracting Officer. Where size, duration, or logistics of project do not facilitate a bulletin board, an alternative method, acceptable to the Contracting Officer, that is accessible and includes all mandatory information for employee and visitor review, may be deemed as meeting the requirement for a bulletin board.
2.2 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL A. Barricades
Erect and maintain temporary barricades to limit public access to hazardous areas. Whenever safe public access to paved areas such as roads, parking areas or sidewalks is prevented by construction activities or as otherwise necessary to ensure the safety of both pedestrian and vehicular traffic barricades will be required. Securely place barricades clearly visible with adequate illumination to provide sufficient visual warning of the hazard during both day and night.
B. Fencing
Provide fencing along the construction site at all open excavations and tunnels to control access by unauthorized people.
a. The safety fencing must be a high visibility orange colored,
high density polyethylene grid or approved equal, a minimum of 48 inches high and maximum mesh size of 2 inches, supported and tightly secured to steel posts located on maximum 10 foot centers, constructed at the approved location. Install fencing to be able to restrain a force of at least 250 pounds against it.
2.3 TEMPORARY WIRING
Provide temporary wiring in accordance with NFPA 241 and NFPA 70. Include frequent inspection of all equipment and apparatus.
PART 3 EXECUTION
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 50 00 Page 45
3.1 EMPLOYEE PARKING
Contractor employees will park privately owned vehicles in an area designated by the Contracting Officer. This area will be within reasonable walking distance of the construction site. Contractor employee parking must not interfere with existing and established parking requirements of the government installation.
3.2 TEMPORARY BULLETIN BOARD
Locate the bulletin board at the project site in a conspicuous place easily accessible to all employees, as approved by the Contracting Officer.
3.3 AVAILABILITY AND USE OF UTILITY SERVICES A. Temporary Utilities
Provide temporary utilities required for construction. Materials may be new or used, must be adequate for the required usage, not create unsafe conditions, and not violate applicable codes and standards.
B. Payment for Utility Services
Reasonable amounts of utilities will be made available without charge. The Contractor will be responsible for making connections, providing transformers and meters, and making disconnections; and for providing backflow preventer devices on connections to domestic water lines. Under no circumstances will taps to base fire hydrants be allowed for obtaining domestic water.
C. Electricity
Provide connections, sized to provide service required for power and lighting. Locate feeder and branch wiring with area distribution boxes so that power is available throughout the project site by use of power cords. 120/240 and/or 480 electrical volt feeder service is available. Provide lighting as required for safe and secure operations. Electricity used will be furnished by the Government.
D. Water
Make connections to existing facilities to provide water for construction purposes. Water used will be furnished by the Government.
E. Sanitation
Provide and maintain temporary sanitation facilities that are self- contained units with both urinals and stool capabilities. Ventilate the units to control odors and fumes and empty and clean them at least once a week or more often if required by the Contracting Officer. The doors shall be self-closing. The exterior of the unit shall match the base standard color. Locate the facility behind the construction fence or out of the public view. Government toilet facilities will not be available to Contractor's personnel
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 50 00 Page 46
F. Telephone
Make arrangements and pay all costs for telephone facilities desired.
[G. Obstruction Lighting of Cranes
Provide a minimum of 2 aviation red or high intensity white obstruction lights on temporary structures (including cranes) over 100 feet above ground level. Light construction and installation must comply with FAA AC 70/7460-1. Lights must be operational during periods of reduced visibility, darkness, and as directed by the Contracting Officer.
]H. Fire Protection
Provide temporary fire protection equipment for the protection of personnel and property during construction. Remove debris and flammable materials daily to minimize potential hazards.
[3.04 TRAFFIC PROVISIONS A. Maintenance of Traffic
a. Conduct operations in a manner that will not close any thoroughfare or interfere in any way with traffic on Base roads except with written permission of the Contracting Officer.]
b. Conduct work so as to minimize obstruction of traffic, and
maintain traffic on at least half of the roadway width at all times. Obtain approval from the Contracting Officer prior to starting any activity that will obstruct traffic.
c. Provide, erect, and maintain, at contractors expense, lights,
barriers, signals, passageways, detours, and other items, that may be required by authority having jurisdiction.
B. Protection of Traffic
Maintain and protect traffic on all affected roads during the construction period except as otherwise specifically directed by the Contracting Officer. Measures for the protection and diversion of traffic, including the provision of watchmen and flagmen, erection of barricades, placing of lights around and in front of equipment the work, and the erection and maintenance of adequate warning, danger, and direction signs, will be as required by the State and local authorities having jurisdiction. Protect the traveling public from damage to person and property. Minimize the interference with public traffic on roads selected for hauling material to and from the site. Investigate the adequacy of existing roads and their allowable load limit. Contractor is responsible for the repair of any damage to roads caused by construction operations.
C. Rush Hour Restrictions
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 50 00 Page 47
Do not interfere with the peak traffic flows preceding and during normal operations for Gulfport CRTC-BAC without notification to and approval by the Contracting Officer.
D. Dust Control
Dust control methods and procedures must be approved by the Contracting Officer. Treat dust abatement on access roads with applications of calcium chloride, water sprinklers, or similar methods or treatment.
3.5 DUMPSTERS
Equip dumpsters with a secure cover. Keep dumpster closed, except when being loaded with trash and debris. Empty site dumpsters at least once a week, or as needed to keep the site free of debris and trash. For large demolitions, large dumpsters without lids are acceptable, but must not have debris higher than the sides before emptying.
3.6 CLEANUP
Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material and the like from the work site daily. Any dirt or mud which is tracked onto paved or surfaced roadways must be cleaned away. Store any salvageable materials resulting from demolition activities within the fenced area described above or at the supplemental storage area. Neatly stack stored materials not in trailers, whether new or salvaged.
3.7 RESTORATION OF STORAGE AREA
Upon completion of the project remove the bulletin board, signs, barricades, haul roads, and any other temporary products from the site. Restore areas used by the Contractor for the storage of equipment or material, or other use to the original or better condition. Remove gravel used to traverse grassed areas and restore the area to its original condition, including top soil and seeding as necessary.
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 57 19 Page 48
SECTION 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
40 CFR 241 Guidelines for Disposal of Solid Waste
40 CFR 243 Guidelines for the Storage and Collection of Residential, Commercial, and Institutional Solid Waste
40 CFR 258 Subtitle D Landfill Requirements
40 CFR 260 Hazardous Waste Management System: General
40 CFR 261 Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste
40 CFR 300 National Oil and Hazardous Substances Pollution Contingency Plan
40 CFR 300.125 National Oil and Hazardous Substances Pollution Contingency Plan - Notification and Communications
40 CFR 355 Emergency Planning and Notification
49 CFR 173 Shippers - General Requirements for Shipments and Packagings
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Solid Waste Management Permit; G
Regulatory Notifications; G (as required)
Contractor Hazardous Material Identification Form; G
SD-06 Test Reports
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 57 19 Page 49
Waste Determination
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Contractor HM Identification Form Part II; G 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
Provide and maintain, during the life of the contract, environmental protection as defined. Plan for and provide environmental protective measures to control pollution that develops during construction practice. Plan for and provide environmental protective measures required to correct conditions that develop during the construction of permanent or temporary environmental features associated with the project. Protect the environmental resources within the project boundaries and those affected outside the limits of permanent work during the entire duration of this Contract. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations pertaining to the environment, including water, air, solid waste, hazardous waste and substances, oily substances, and noise pollution.
Tests and procedures assessing whether construction operations comply with Applicable Environmental Laws may be required. Analytical work must be performed by qualified laboratories; and where required by law, the laboratories must be certified.
A. Conformance with the Environmental Management System
Perform work under this contract consistent with the policy and objectives identified in the installation's Environmental Management System (EMS). Perform work in a manner that conforms to objectives and targets of the environmental programs and operational controls identified by the EMS. Support Government personnel when environmental compliance and EMS audits are conducted by escorting auditors at the Project site, answering questions, and providing proof of records being maintained. Provide monitoring and measurement information as necessary to address environmental performance relative to environmental, energy, and transportation management goals. In the event an EMS nonconformance or environmental noncompliance associated with the contracted services, tasks, or actions occurs, take corrective and preventative actions. In addition, employees must be aware of their roles and responsibilities under the installation EMS and of how these EMS roles and responsibilities affect work performed under the contract.
Coordinate with the installation's EMS coordinator to identify training needs associated with environmental aspects and the EMS, and arrange training or take other action to meet these needs. Provide training documentation to the Contracting Officer. The Installation Environmental Office will retain associated environmental compliance records.
1.4 SPECIAL ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 57 19 Page 50
Comply with all the special environmental requirements. Special environmental requirements may include, but not be limited to the following:
National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA) compliance measures specified in the Categorical Exclusion documentation
Environmental Assessment (EA)
Environmental Impact Statement (EIS)
Installation Development Plan (IDP)
Installation Storm Water Management Plan
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Notifications
Provide regulatory notification requirements in accordance with federal, state and local regulations. In cases where the Government will also provide public notification (such as stormwater permitting), coordinate with the Contracting Officer. Submit copies of regulatory notifications to the Contracting Officer at least 5 working days prior to commencement of work activities. Typically, regulatory notifications must be provided for the following (this listing is not all-inclusive): demolition, renovation, NPDES defined site work, construction, removal or use of a permitted air emissions source, and remediation of controlled substances (asbestos, hazardous waste, lead paint).
B. Environmental Brief
Attend an environmental brief to be included in the preconstruction meeting. Provide the following information: types, quantities, and use of hazardous materials that will be brought onto the installation; and types and quantities of wastes/wastewater that may be generated during the Contract. Discuss the results of the Preconstruction Survey at this time.
Prior to initiating any work on site, meet with the Contracting Officer and installation Environmental Office to discuss the proposed Environmental Protection. Develop a mutual understanding relative to the details of environmental protection, including measures for protecting natural and cultural resources, required reports, required permits, permit requirements (such as mitigation measures), and other measures to be taken.
C. Non-Compliance Notifications
The Contracting Officer will notify the Contractor in writing of any observed noncompliance with federal, state or local environmental laws or regulations, and permits. After receipt of such notice, inform the Contracting Officer of the proposed corrective action and take such action when approved by the Contracting Officer. The Contracting Officer may issue an order stopping all or part of the work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No time
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 57 19 Page 51
extensions will be granted or equitable adjustments allowed for any such suspensions. This is in addition to any other actions the Contracting Officer may take under the contract, or in accordance with the Federal Acquisition Regulation or Federal Law.
1.6 LICENSES AND PERMITS
Obtain licenses and permits required for the construction of the project and in accordance with FAR 52.236-7. Notify the Government of all general use permitted equipment the Contractor plans to use on site. This paragraph supplements the Contractor's responsibility under FAR 52.236-7.
Before any excavation is started, obtain an approved AF Form 103, BCE Work Clearance Request through the Gulfport CRTC-BAC Civil Engineering via the Contracting Officer. The permit form is self-explanatory. Fill in the applicable items on the permit and give it to the Contracting Officer in sufficient time for Station personnel to process the permit, but not less than 5 working days prior to planned excavation.
1.7 SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT PERMIT
Provide the Contracting Officer with written notification of the locations where various types of waste will be disposed or recycled. Submit one copy of the receiving location state and local Solid Waste Management Permit or license before transporting wastes off Government property.
PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 WASTE DETERMINATION
Maintain an inventory of nonhazardous solid waste diversion and disposal of construction and demolition debris. Submit a report to COR through the Contracting Officer on the first working day after each month, starting the first month that nonhazardous solid waste has been generated. Include the following in the report:
Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris Disposed
[ ] [cubic yards][tons],[cubic meters] as appropriate
C&D Debris Recycled [ ] [cubic yards][tons],[cubic meters] as appropriate
Total C&D Debris Generated [ ] [cubic yards][tons],[cubic meters] as appropriate
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 57 19 Page 52
Construction and Demolition (C&D) Debris Disposed
[ ] [cubic yards][tons],[cubic meters] as appropriate
Waste Sent to Waste-To-Energy Incineration Plant (This amount should not be included in the recycled amount)
[ ] [cubic yards][tons],[cubic meters] as appropriate
3.2 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL A. Control and Management of Solid Wastes
Pick up solid wastes, and place in covered containers that are regularly emptied. Do not prepare or cook food on the project site. Prevent contamination of the site or other areas when handling and disposing of wastes. At project completion, leave the areas clean. Employ segregation measures so that no hazardous or toxic waste will become co-mingled with non-hazardous solid waste. Transport solid waste off Government property and dispose of it in compliance with 40 CFR 260, state, and local requirements for solid waste disposal. A Subtitle D RCRA permitted landfill is the minimum acceptable offsite solid waste disposal option. Verify that the selected transporters and disposal facilities have the necessary permits and licenses to operate. Segregate and separate treated wood components disposed at a lined landfill approved to accept this waste in accordance with local and state regulations. Solid waste disposal offsite must comply with most stringent local, state, and federal requirements, including 40 CFR 241, 40 CFR 243, and 40 CFR 258.
Manage hazardous material used in construction, including but not limited to, aerosol cans, waste paint, cleaning solvents, contaminated brushes, and used rags, in accordance with 49 CFR 173.
B. Control and Management of Hazardous Waste
Do not dispose of hazardous waste on Government property. Do not discharge any waste to a sanitary sewer, storm drain, or to surface waters or conduct waste treatment or disposal on Government property without written approval of the Contracting Officer.
C. Releases/Spills of Oil and Hazardous Substances
1. Response and Notifications
Exercise due diligence to prevent, contain, and respond to spills of hazardous material, hazardous substances, hazardous waste, sewage, regulated gas, petroleum, lubrication oil, and other substances regulated in accordance with 40 CFR 300. Maintain spill cleanup equipment and materials at the work site. In the event of a spill, take prompt, effective action to stop, contain, curtail, or otherwise limit the amount, duration, and severity of the spill/release. In the event of any releases of oil and hazardous substances, chemicals, or gases; immediately (within 15 minutes) notify the Installation Fire Department, the
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 57 19 Page 53
Installation Environmental Office, the Contracting Officer and the state or local authority.
Submit verbal and written notifications as required by the federal (40 CFR 300.125 and 40 CFR 355), state, local regulations and instructions. Provide copies of the written notification and documentation that a verbal notification was made within 20 days. Spill response must be in accordance with 40 CFR 300 and applicable state and local regulations. Contain and clean up these spills without cost to the Government.
2. Clean Up
Clean up hazardous and non-hazardous waste spills. Reimburse the Government for costs incurred including sample analysis materials, clothing, equipment, and labor if the Government will initiate its own spill cleanup procedures, for Contractor- responsible spills, when: Spill cleanup procedures have not begun within one hour of spill discovery/occurrence; or, in the Government's judgment, spill cleanup is inadequate and the spill remains a threat to human health or the environment.
3.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL MANAGEMENT
Do not bring hazardous material onto Government property that does not directly relate to requirements for the performance of this contract. Submit an SDS and estimated quantities to be used for each hazardous material to the Contracting Officer prior to bringing the material on the installation. Typical materials requiring SDS and quantity reporting include, but are not limited to, oil and latex based painting and caulking products, solvents, adhesives, aerosol, and petroleum products. Use hazardous materials in a manner that minimizes the amount of hazardous waste generated. Containers of hazardous materials must have National Fire Protection Association labels or their equivalent. Certify that hazardous materials removed from the site are hazardous materials and do not meet the definition of hazardous waste, in accordance with 40 CFR 261.
A. Contractor Hazardous Material Identification Form
Submit the Contractor Hazardous Material Identification Form(provided at the pre-construction conference), which provides information required by (EPCRA Sections 312 and 313) along with corresponding Safety Data Sheets (SDS), to the Contracting Officer prior to bringing any hazardous materials on base. Keep copies of the SDS for hazardous materials on site at all times. At the end of the project, provide the Contracting Officer with copies of all of these SDS, and the maximum quantity of each material that was present at the site at any one time, the dates the material was present, the amount of each material that was used during the project, and how the material was used.
In addition to the materials (e.g. paints, lacquers, thinners, adhesives, sealants, cleaners) required in the Contractor Hazardous Material Identification Form, include the following materials:
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 57 19 Page 54
a. If performing abrasive blasting operations, denote blast grit usage, blast nozzle throughput in tons, and blasting unit efficiency.
b. If performing welding, denote welding rod usage and welding rod
type (e.g. aluminum, carbon steel).
Documentation for any spills/releases, environmental reports or off- site transfers may be requested by the Contracting Officer.
The contractor shall maintain Contractor Hazardous Material Identification Form for HM on the job site for inspection/verification.
Submit the Contractor HM Identification Form Part II 10 days prior to final acceptance.
The Contracting Officer may request documentation for any spills or releases, environmental reports, or off-site transfers.
3.4 MILITARY MUNITIONS
In the event military munitions, as defined in 40 CFR 260, are discovered or uncovered, immediately stop work in that area and immediately inform the Contracting Officer.
3.5 PETROLEUM, OIL, LUBRICANT (POL) STORAGE AND FUELING A. Oil Storage Including Fuel Tanks
Use drip pans during oil transfer operations; adequate absorbent material must be onsite to clean up any spills and prevent releases to the environment. Cover tanks and drip pans during inclement weather. Provide procedures and equipment to prevent overfilling of tanks.
3.6 INADVERTENT DISCOVERY OF PETROLEUM-CONTAMINATED SOIL OR HAZARDOUS WASTES
If petroleum-contaminated soil, or suspected hazardous waste is found during construction that was not identified in the Contract documents, immediately notify the Contracting Officer. Do not disturb this material until authorized by the Contracting Officer.
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 71 23 Page 55
SECTION 01 71 23 FIELD ENGINEERING
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY
This work consists of performing all calculations and other work necessary to establish and/or verify all horizontal and vertical control data and furnishing, placing, and maintaining construction stakes necessary for the proper construction of all features and items this project. Any references in other sections of the specifications to establishment of control points or construction staking shall be construed to mean "by the Contractor".
1.2 BASE CIVIL ENGINEERING (BCE) WORK CLEARANCE REQUEST
Obtain an approved BCE Work Clearance Request, AF Form 103, prior to the start of excavation, digging work, or work that disrupts aircraft or vehicular traffic flow, base utility services, fire and intrusion alarm system, or routine activities of the Base.
1.3 GOVERNMENT'S RESPONSIBILITY
Establish benchmark on or near site
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY
The Contractor shall furnish all personnel, materials, equipment, and devices necessary for determining, establishing, setting, checking, and maintaining points, lines, grades, and layout of the work. All surveying equipment shall be properly adjusted and suited for performing the work required. Traffic control necessary for the proper execution of the work shall be furnished by the Contractor without separate measurement for payment. Stakes shall be of sufficient length, thickness, and quality to serve the purpose for which they are being used.
Call and request local utility companies to locate and mark their utility lines prior to any commencement of work.
Contractor will be responsible for verifying and modifying as necessary to best fit existing field conditions, lengths, locations, elevations, and skew angles of all structures shown on the construction plans. All structure locations and heights shall also be verified and modified as necessary to fit existing field conditions. Modifications to the plans shall not be made without the written consent of the Government.
The Contractor shall perform work necessary to verify alignment and plan grades on all construction and tie-ins. Any discrepancies in grades, alignment, location, and/or dimension detected by the Contractor shall immediately be brought to the attention of the Engineer.
The Contractor shall employ sufficient qualified personnel experienced in surveying and layout to complete the work accurately. The Contractor shall also determine and provide all additional grade controls and
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 71 23 Page 56
staking operations necessary to secure a correct layout and construction of the work. All minor variations in layout and grades required to meet field conditions shall be resolved with the Architect and shall not be considered justification for adjusting contract price or time.
The Contractor will be responsible for establishing all lines, grades, elevations, and dimensions called for on the plans. All grades and other layout data computed by the Contractor shall be recorded and a copy of this data shall be furnished, with sufficient time for checking, to the Government before field work is started. The originals of all data shall be furnished to the Government on or before final inspection for the Contracting Officer's permanent file. The Contractor shall also furnish personnel to assist the Government in taking stringline or other notes to determine whether specified tolerances are met. Any observation or checking of the Contractor's layout by the Government and the approval of all or any part of it will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to secure proper dimensions, grades, and elevations of the several parts of the work.
Prior to beginning construction on any structure which is referenced to an existing structure or topographical feature, the Contractor shall check the pertinent locations and grades of the existing structures or topographical features to determine whether the locations and grades shown on the plans are correct.
The Contractor shall furnish "as-built" finish centerline elevations to the Government prior to final inspection of the project.
The Government reserves the right to check for accuracy any or all of the Contractor's layout work and shall be assisted by the Contractor's personnel in such checking. When errors or discrepancies are found, the Contractor will take measures necessary to correct, at no expense to the Contracting Officer, any construction that has been performed using the improper layout. An observation, inspection, checking, and/or approval thereof by the Government of work for which the Contractor is responsible will not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to secure correct dimensions, grades, elevations, alignments, and locations of the work for satisfactory completion of the project and as a condition for final acceptance by the Contracting Officer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 74 19 Page 57
SECTION 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GOVERNMENT POLICY
Government policy is to apply sound environmental principles in the design, construction and use of facilities. As part of the implementation of that policy: (1) practice efficient waste management when sizing, cutting, and installing products and materials and (2) use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators and to facilitate their recycling or reuse. Divert a minimum of 60 percent by weight of total project solid waste from the landfill.
1.2 MANAGEMENT
Develop and implement a waste management program. Take a pro-active, responsible role in the management of construction and demolition waste and require all subcontractors, vendors, and suppliers to participate in the effort. Construction and demolition waste includes products of demolition or removal, excess or unusable construction materials, packaging materials for construction products, and other materials generated during the construction process but not incorporated into the work. In the management of waste, consider the availability of viable markets, the condition of the material, the ability to provide the material in suitable condition and in a quantity acceptable to available markets, and time constraints imposed by internal project completion mandates. Implement any special programs involving rebates or similar incentives related to recycling of waste. Revenues or other savings obtained for salvage, or recycling accrue to the Contractor. Appropriately permit firms and facilities used for recycling, reuse, and disposal for the intended use to the extent required by federal, state, and local regulations. Also, provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Records
1.4 RECORDS
Maintain records to document the quantity of waste generated; the quantity of waste diverted through sale, reuse, or recycling; and the quantity of waste disposed by landfill or incineration. Quantities may be measured by weight or by volume, but must be consistent throughout.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 74 19 Page 58
List each type of waste separately noting the disposal or diversion date. Identify the landfill, recycling center, waste processor, or other organization used to process or receive the solid waste. Provide explanations for any waste not recycled or reused. With each application for payment, submit updated documentation for solid waste disposal and diversion, and submit manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices specifically identifying the project and waste material. Make the records available to the Contracting Officer during construction, and deliver to the Contracting Officer upon completion of the construction a copy of the records.
Demolition accomplished by other parties on this project site count toward the project's total waste diversion. Information on the quantity and disposition of these materials will be provided by the Contracting Officer. Include this data in records, annotated to indicate that it was accomplished by another party.
1.5 REPORTS
Provide monthly reports and a final report to the COR. Include project name, information for waste generated this month, and cumulative totals for the project in final report. Also include in each report, supporting documentation to include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices specifically identifying the project and waste material. Include demolition information, if any.
1.6 COLLECTION
Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable and waste products in a manner that maximizes recyclability of identified materials. Provide the necessary containers, bins and storage areas to facilitate effective waste management and clearly and appropriately identify them. Provide materials for barriers and enclosures around recyclable material storage areas which are nonhazardous and recyclable or reusable. Locate out of the way of construction traffic. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean, and handle recyclable materials to prevent contamination of materials from incompatible products and materials. Clean contaminated materials prior to placing in collection containers. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous and biodegradable. Handle hazardous waste and hazardous materials in accordance with applicable regulations. Separate materials by one of the following methods:
A. Source Separated Method.
Separate waste products and materials that are recyclable from trash and sorted as described below into appropriately marked separate containers and then transported to the respective recycling facility for further processing. Deliver materials in accordance with recycling or reuse facility requirements (e.g., free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process). Separate materials into the following category types as appropriate to the project waste and to the available recycling and reuse programs in the project area:
a. Concrete and masonry.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 74 19 Page 59
b. Metal (e.g. banding, stud trim, ductwork, piping, rebar, roofing, other trim, steel, iron, galvanized, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead brass, bronze).
(1) Ferrous.
(2) Non-ferrous.
c. Wood (nails and staples allowed).
d. Debris.
e. Non-hazardous paint and paint cans.
B. Other Methods.
Other proposed methods may be used when approved by the Contracting Officer.
1.7 DISPOSAL
Control accumulation of waste materials and trash. Recycle or dispose of collected materials off-site at intervals approved by the Contracting Officer and in compliance with waste management procedures. Except as otherwise specified in other sections of the specifications, dispose of in accordance with the following:
A. Recycle.
Recycle waste materials not suitable for reuse, but having value as being recyclable. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facilities in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials.
B. Waste.
Dispose of materials with no practical use or economic benefit to waste-to-energy plants where available. As the last choice, dispose of materials at a landfill or incinerator.
C. Return
Set aside and protect mis-delivered and substandard products and materials and return to supplier for credit.
PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not used.
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 78 00 Page 60
SECTION 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM E1971 (2005; R 2011) Standard Guide for
Stewardship for the Cleaning of Commercial and Institutional Buildings
GREEN SEAL (GS)
GS-37 (2012) Cleaning Products for Industrial
and Institutional Use
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
ERDC/ITL TR-12-6 (2015) A/E/C CAD Standard - Release 6.0 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. As-Built Drawings
As-built drawings are developed and maintained by the Contractor and depict actual conditions, including deviations from the Contract Documents. These deviations and additions may result from coordination required by, but not limited to: contract modifications; official responses to Contractor submitted Requests for Information; direction from the Contracting Officer; designs which are the responsibility of the Contractor, and differing site conditions. Maintain the as-builts throughout construction as red- lined hard copies on site. These files serve as the basis for the creation of the record drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
As-Built Drawings; G
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 78 00 Page 61
1.4 QUALITY CONTROL
Additions and corrections to the contract drawings must be equal in quality and detail to that of the originals. Line colors, line weights, lettering, layering conventions, and symbols must conform to ERDC/ITL TR-12-6.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
Provide and maintain two black line print copies of the PDF contract drawings for As-Built Drawings. Submit As-Built Drawings 5 days prior to Beneficial Occupancy Date (BOD).
A. Markup Guidelines
Make comments and markup the drawings complete without reference to letters, memos, or materials that are not part of the As-Built drawing. Show what was changed, how it was changed, where item(s) were relocated and change related details. These working as-built markup prints must be neat, legible and accurate as follows:
a. Use base colors of red, green, and blue. Color code for changes
as follows:
(1) Special (Blue) - Items requiring special information, coordination, or special detailing or detailing notes.
(2) Deletions (Red) - Over-strike deleted graphic items (lines),
lettering in notes and leaders.
(3) Additions (Green) - Added items, lettering in notes and leaders.
b. Provide a legend if colors other than the "base" colors of red,
green, and blue are used.
c. Add and denote any additional equipment or material facilities, service lines, incorporated under As-Built Revisions if not already shown in legend.
d. Use frequent written explanations on markup drawings to describe
changes. Do not totally rely on graphic means to convey the revision.
e. Use legible lettering and precise and clear digital values when
marking prints. Clarify ambiguities concerning the nature and application of change involved.
f. Wherever a revision is made, also make changes to related
section views, details, legend, profiles, plans and elevation
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 78 00 Page 62
views, schedules, notes and call out designations, and mark accordingly to avoid conflicting data on all other sheets.
g. For deletions, cross out all features, data and captions that
relate to that revision.
h. For changes on small-scale drawings and in restricted areas, provide large-scale inserts, with leaders to the applicable location.
i. Indicate one of the following when attaching a print or sketch
to a markup print:
1) Add an entire drawing to contract drawings
2) Change the contract drawing to show
3) Provided for reference only to further detail the initial design.
j. Incorporate all shop and fabrication drawings into the markup
drawings. B. As-Built Drawings Content
Revise As-Built Drawings in accordance with ERDC/ITL TR-12-6. Provide 2 sets of paper copies from PDF drawings to show the as- built conditions by red-line process during the execution of the project. Keep these working as-built markup drawings current on a weekly basis and at least one set available on the jobsite at all times. Changes from the contract drawings which are made during construction or additional information which might be uncovered in the course of construction must be accurately and neatly recorded as they occur by means of details and notes. Submit the working as- built markup drawings for approval prior to submission of each monthly pay estimate. For failure to maintain the working and final record drawings as specified herein, the Contracting Officer will withhold 10 percent of the monthly progress payment until approval of updated drawings. Show on the as-built drawings, but not limited to, the following information:
a. The actual location, kinds and sizes of all sub-surface utility
lines. In order that the location of these lines and appurtenances may be determined in the event the surface openings or indicators become covered over or obscured, show by offset dimensions to two permanently fixed surface features the end of each run including each change in direction on the record drawings. Locate valves, splice boxes and similar appurtenances by dimensioning along the utility run from a reference point. Also record the average depth below the surface of each run.
b. The location and dimensions of any changes within the building
structure.
c. Layout and schematic drawings of electrical circuits and piping.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 78 00 Page 63
d. Correct grade, elevations, cross section, or alignment of roads, earthwork, structures or utilities if any changes were made from contract plans.
e. Changes in details of design or additional information obtained
from working drawings specified to be prepared and/or furnished by the Contractor; including but not limited to shop drawings, fabrication, erection, installation plans and placing details, pipe sizes, insulation material, dimensions of equipment foundations, etc.
f. The topography, invert elevations and grades of drainage
installed or affected as part of the project construction.
g. Changes or Revisions which result from the final inspection.
h. Where contract drawings or specifications present options, show only the option selected for construction on the working as-built markup drawings.
i. If borrow material for this project is from sources on
Government property, or if Government property is used as a spoil area, furnish a contour map of the final borrow pit/spoil area elevations.
j. Systems designed or enhanced by the Contractor, such as HVAC
controls, fire alarm, fire sprinkler, and irrigation systems.
k. Changes in location of equipment and architectural features.
l. Modifications (include within change order price the cost to change working as-built markup drawings to reflect modifications).
m. Actual location of anchors, construction and control joints,
etc., in concrete.
n. Unusual or uncharted obstructions that are encountered in the contract work area during construction.
o. Location, extent, thickness, and size of stone protection
particularly where it will be normally submerged by water. 3.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Provide project operation and maintenance manuals as specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS DATA. Provide electronic copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manual files. Submit to the Contracting Officer for approval within 10 calendar days of the Beneficial Occupancy Date (BOD).
3.3 CLEANUP
Provide final cleaning in accordance with ASTM E1971. Leave premises "broom clean." Comply with GS-37 for general purpose cleaning and bathroom cleaning. Use only nonhazardous cleaning materials, including natural cleaning materials, in the final cleanup. Clean interior and
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 78 00 Page 64
exterior glass surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances; polish transparent and glossy surfaces; vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. Replace filters of operating equipment. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts and drainage systems. Sweep paved areas and rake clean landscaped areas. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish and construction facilities from the site. Recycle, salvage, and return construction and demolition waste from project in accordance with Section 01 57 19 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS, and 01 74 19 CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT.
3.4 REAL PROPERTY RECORD
The Contractor shall assist the Government in completion of the Checklist for DD FORM 1354 before final payment submitted and made.
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 78 23 Page 65
SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data for the provided equipment, product, or system, defining the importance of system interactions, troubleshooting, and long-term preventive operation and maintenance. Compile, prepare, and aggregate O&M data to include clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions. Organize and present information in sufficient detail to clearly explain O&M requirements at the system, equipment, component, and subassembly level. Include an index preceding each submittal. Submit in accordance with this section and Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
A. Package Quality
Documents must be fully legible. Operation and Maintenance data must be consistent with the manufacturer's standard brochures, schematics, printed instructions, general operating procedures, and safety precautions.
B. Package Content
Provide data package content in accordance with paragraph SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES. Comply with the data package requirements specified in the individual technical sections, including the content of the packages and addressing each product, component, and system designated for data package submission.
C. Changes to Submittals
Provide manufacturer-originated changes or revisions to submitted data if a component of an item is so affected subsequent to acceptance of the O&M Data. Submit changes, additions, or revisions required by the Contracting Officer for final acceptance of submitted data within 30 calendar days of the notification of this change requirement.
1.2 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FILE FORMAT
Assemble data packages into electronic Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file using the most current version of Adobe Acrobat or similar software capable of producing PDF file format. Provide compact disks (CD) or data digital versatile disk (DVD) as appropriate, so that each one contains operation, maintenance and record files, project record documents, and training videos. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.
1.3 TYPES OF INFORMATION REQUIRED IN O&M DATA PACKAGES
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 78 23 Page 66
The following are a detailed description of the data package items listed in paragraph SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES.
A. Operating Instructions
Provide specific instructions, procedures, and illustrations for the following phases of operation for the installed model and features of each system:
1. Safety Precautions and Hazards
List personnel hazards and equipment or product safety precautions for operating conditions.
2. Normal Operations
Provide Control Diagrams with data to explain operation and control of systems and specific equipment. Provide narrative description of Normal Operating Procedures.
3. Emergency Operations
Provide Emergency Procedures for equipment malfunctions to permit a short period of continued operation or to shut down the equipment to prevent further damage to systems and equipment. Provide Emergency Shutdown Instructions for fire, explosion, spills, or other foreseeable contingencies. Provide guidance and procedures for emergency operation of utility systems including required valve positions, valve locations and zones or portions of systems controlled.
4. Operator Service Requirements
Provide instructions for services to be performed by the operator such as lubrication, adjustment, inspection, and recording gauge readings.
B. Preventive Maintenance
Provide the following information for preventive and scheduled maintenance to minimize repairs for the installed model and features of each system. Include potential environmental and indoor air quality impacts of recommended maintenance procedures and materials.
1. Lubrication Data
Include the following preventive maintenance lubrication data, in addition to instructions for lubrication required under paragraph OPERATOR SERVICE REQUIREMENTS:
a. A table showing recommended lubricants for specific
temperature ranges and applications.
b. Charts with a schematic diagram of the equipment showing lubrication points, recommended types and grades of lubricants, and capacities.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 78 23 Page 67
c. A Lubrication Schedule showing service interval frequency.
2. Preventive Maintenance Plan, Schedule, and Procedures
Provide manufacturer's schedule for routine preventive maintenance, inspections, condition monitoring (predictive tests) and adjustments required to ensure proper and economical operation and to minimize repairs. Provide instructions stating when the systems should be retested. Provide manufacturer's projection of preventive maintenance work-hours on a daily, weekly, monthly, and annual basis including craft requirements by type of craft. For periodic calibrations, provide manufacturer's specified frequency and procedures for each separate operation.
a. Define the anticipated time required to perform each of each
test (work-hours), test apparatus, number of personnel identified by responsibility, and a testing validation procedure permitting the record operation capability requirements within the schedule. Provide a remarks column for the testing validation procedure referencing operating limits of time, pressure, temperature, volume, voltage, current, acceleration, velocity, alignment, calibration, adjustments, cleaning, or special system notes. Delineate procedures for preventive maintenance, inspection, adjustment, lubrication and cleaning necessary to minimize repairs.
b. Repair requirements must inform operators how to check out,
troubleshoot, repair, and replace components of the system. Include electrical and mechanical schematics and diagrams and diagnostic techniques necessary to enable operation and troubleshooting of the system after acceptance.
C. Repair
Provide manufacturer's recommended procedures and instructions for correcting problems and making repairs.
1. Troubleshooting Guides and Diagnostic Techniques
Provide step-by-step procedures to promptly isolate the cause of typical malfunctions. Describe clearly why the checkout is performed and what conditions are to be sought. Identify tests or inspections and test equipment required to determine whether parts and equipment may be reused or require replacement.
[2. Wiring Diagrams and Control Diagrams
Provide point-to-point drawings of wiring and control circuits including factory-field interfaces. Provide a complete and accurate depiction of the actual job specific wiring and control work. On diagrams, number electrical and electronic wiring and pneumatic control tubing and the terminals for each type, identically to actual installation configuration and numbering.
]3. Repair Procedures
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 78 23 Page 68
Provide instructions and a list of tools required to repair or restore the product or equipment to proper condition or operating standards.
4. Removal and Replacement Instructions
Provide step-by-step procedures and a list of required tools and supplies for removal, replacement, disassembly, and assembly of components, assemblies, subassemblies, accessories, and attachments. Provide tolerances, dimensions, settings and adjustments required. Use a combination of text and illustrations.
5. Spare Parts and Supply Lists
Provide lists of spare parts and supplies required for repair to ensure continued service or operation without unreasonable delays. Special consideration is required for facilities at remote locations. List spare parts and supplies that have a long lead-time to obtain.
D. Appendices
Provide information required below and information not specified in the preceding paragraphs but pertinent to the maintenance or operation of the product or equipment. Include the following:
1. Product Submittal Data
Provide a copy of SD-03 Product Data submittals documented with the required approval.
2. Manufacturer's Instructions
Provide a copy of SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions submittals documented with the required approval.
3. O&M Submittal Data
Provide a copy of SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data submittals documented with the required approval.
4. Parts Identification
Provide identification and coverage for the parts of each component, assembly, subassembly, and accessory of the end items subject to replacement. Include special hardware requirements, such as requirement to use high-strength bolts and nuts. Identify parts by make, model, serial number, and source of supply to allow reordering without further identification. Provide clear and legible illustrations, drawings, and exploded views to enable easy identification of the items. When illustrations omit the part numbers and description, both the illustrations and separate listing must show the index, reference, or key number that will cross-reference the illustrated part to the listed part. Group the parts shown in the listings by components, assemblies, and subassemblies in
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 78 23 Page 69
accordance with the manufacturer's standard practice. Parts data may cover more than one model or series of equipment, components, assemblies, subassemblies, attachments, or accessories, such as typically shown in a master parts catalog.
5. Warranty Information
List and explain the various warranties and clearly identify the servicing and technical precautions prescribed by the manufacturers or contract documents in order to keep warranties in force. Include warranty information for primary components of the system. Provide copies of warranties required by Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.
6. Extended Warranty Information
List all warranties for products, equipment, components, and sub- components whose duration exceeds one year. For each warranty listed, indicate the applicable specification section, duration, start date, end date, and the point of contact for warranty fulfillment. Also, list or reference the specific operation and maintenance procedures that must be performed to keep the warranty valid. Provide copies of warranties required by Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS.
7. Personnel Training Requirements
Provide information available from the manufacturers that is needed for use in training designated personnel to properly operate and maintain the equipment and systems.
8. Testing Equipment and Special Tool Information
Include information on test equipment required to perform specified tests and on special tools needed for the operation, maintenance, and repair of components. Provide final set points.
9. Testing and Performance Data
Include completed pre-functional checklists, functional performance test forms, and monitoring reports. Include recommended schedule for retesting and blank test forms. Provide final set points.
10. Field Test Reports
Provide a copy of Field Test Reports (SD-06) submittals documented with the required approval.
11. Contractor Information
Provide a list that includes the name, address, and telephone number of the General Contractor and each Subcontractor who installed the product or equipment, or system. For each item, also provide the name address and telephone number of the manufacturer's representative and service organization that can provide replacements most convenient to the project site.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 78 23 Page 70
Provide the name, address, and telephone number of the product, equipment, and system manufacturers.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PACKAGES
Provide the O&M data packages specified in individual technical sections. The information required in each type of data package follows:
A. Data Package
a. Safety precautions and hazards
b. Normal operations
c. Emergency operations
d. Lubrication data
e. Preventive maintenance plan, schedule, and procedures
f. Cleaning recommendations
g. Troubleshooting guides and diagnostic techniques
h. Wiring diagrams and control diagrams
i. Maintenance and repair procedures
j. Removal and replacement instructions
k. Spare parts and supply list
l. Product submittal data
m. O&M submittal data
n. Parts identification
o. Warranty information
p. Extended warranty information
q. Testing equipment and special tool information
r. Testing and performance data
s. Contractor information
PART 2 PRODUCTS
Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRAINING
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 01 78 23 Page 71
Prior to acceptance of the facility by the Contracting Officer for Beneficial Occupancy, provide comprehensive training for the systems and equipment specified in the technical specifications. The training must be targeted for the building maintenance personnel, and applicable building occupants. Instructors must be well-versed in the particular systems that they are presenting. Address aspects of the Operation and Maintenance Manual submitted in accordance with Section 01 78 00 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS. Training must be based on the system operating requirements.
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 02 41 00 Page 72
SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SAFETY ENGINEERS (ASSE/SAFE)
ASSE/SAFE A10.6 (2006) Safety Requirements for
Demolition Operations
U.S. ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS (USACE)
EM 385-1-1 (2014) Safety and Health Requirements Manual
U.S. NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION (NARA)
40 CFR 61 National Emission Standards for
Hazardous Air Pollutants 1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION A. General Requirements
Do not begin demolition until authorization is received from the Contracting Officer. The work of this section is to be performed in a manner that maximizes the value derived recycling of materials. Remove rubbish and debris from the project site daily; do not allow accumulations inside or outside the building[s]. [The work includes demolition of identified items and materials, and removal of resulting rubbish and debris. Remove rubbish and debris from Government property daily, unless otherwise directed. Store materials that cannot be removed daily in areas specified by the Contracting Officer. In the interest of occupational safety and health, perform the work in accordance with EM 385-1-1, Section 23, Demolition, and other applicable Sections.
1.3 ITEMS TO REMAIN IN PLACE
Take necessary precautions to avoid damage to existing items to remain in place, to be reused, or to remain the property of the Government. Repair or replace damaged items as approved by the Contracting Officer. Coordinate the work of this section with all other work indicated. Construct and maintain shoring, bracing, and supports as required. Ensure that structural elements are not overloaded. Increase structural supports or add new supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, deconstruction, or demolition work performed under this contract. Do not overload structural elements or pavements to remain. Provide new supports and reinforcement for existing
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 02 41 00 Page 73
construction weakened by demolition, deconstruction, or removal work. Repairs, reinforcement, or structural replacement require approval by the Contracting Officer prior to performing such work.
A. Existing Construction Limits and Protection
Do not disturb existing construction beyond the extent indicated or necessary for installation of new construction. Provide protective measures to control accumulation and migration of dust and dirt in all work areas. Remove dust, dirt, and debris from work areas daily.
B. Trees
Protect trees within the project site which might be damaged during demolition or deconstruction, and which are indicated to be left in place, by a 6 foot high fence. Erect and secure fence a minimum of 5 feet from the trunk of individual trees or follow the outer perimeter of branches or clumps of trees. Replace any tree designated to remain that is damaged during the work under this contract with like-kind or as approved by the Contracting Officer.
C. Utility Service
Maintain existing utilities indicated to stay in service and protect against damage during demolition and deconstruction operations. Prior to start of work, utilities serving each area of alteration or removal will be shut off by the Government and disconnected and sealed by the Contractor.
D. Facilities
Protect electrical and mechanical services and utilities. Where removal of existing utilities and pavement is specified or indicated, provide approved barricades, temporary covering of exposed areas, and temporary services or connections for electrical and mechanical utilities. Ensure that no elements determined to be unstable are left unsupported and place and secure bracing, shoring, or lateral supports as may be required as a result of any cutting, removal, deconstruction, or demolition work performed under this contract.
1.4 BURNING
The use of burning at the project site for the disposal of refuse and debris will not be permitted.
1.5 AVAILABILITY OF WORK AREAS
Areas in which the work is to be accomplished will be available in accordance with the following schedule:
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 02 41 00 Page 74
Schedule
Area Date
Air to Ground Range [ ]
1.6 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-07 Certificates
Notification; G
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Submit timely notification of demolition projects to Federal, State, regional, and local authorities in accordance with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M. Notify the State's environmental protection agency, if applicable and the Contracting Officer in writing 10 working days prior to the commencement of work in accordance with 40 CFR 61, Subpart M. Comply with federal, state, and local hauling and disposal regulations. In addition to the requirements of the "Contract Clauses," conform to the safety requirements contained in ASSE/SAFE A10.6. Comply with the Environmental Protection Agency requirements specified. Use of explosives will not be permitted.
A. Dust and Debris Control
Prevent the spread of dust and debris and avoid the creation of a nuisance or hazard in the surrounding area. Do not use water if it results in hazardous or objectionable conditions such as, but not limited to, ice, flooding, or pollution.
1.8 PROTECTION A. Protection of Personnel
Before, during and after the demolition work continuously evaluate the condition and take immediate action to protect all personnel working in and around the project site.
1.9 RELOCATIONS
Perform the removal and reinstallation of relocated items as indicated with workmen skilled in the trades involved. Repair or replace items to be relocated which are damaged by the Contractor with new undamaged items as approved by the Contracting Officer.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 02 41 00 Page 75
1.10 EXISTING CONDITIONS
Before beginning any demolition work, survey the site and examine the drawings and specifications to determine the extent of the work. Record existing conditions in the presence of the Contracting Officer showing the condition of structures and other facilities adjacent to areas of alteration or removal. Photographs sized 4 inch will be acceptable as a record of existing conditions. Include in the record the elevation of the top of foundation walls, finish floor elevations, possible conflicting electrical conduits, plumbing lines, alarms systems, the location and extent of existing cracks and other damage and description of surface conditions that exist prior to before starting work. It is the Contractor's responsibility to verify and document all required outages which will be required during the course of work, and to note these outages on the record document. Submit survey results.
PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXISTING FACILITIES TO BE REMOVED
Inspect and evaluate existing structures onsite for recycling and disposal. Removed materials are to be separated, set aside, and prepared as specified, and stored or delivered to a collection point for recycling or disposal, as specified.
A. Utilities and Related Equipment
1. General Requirements
Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by the Contracting Officer.
2. Existing Utilities
When utility lines are encountered but are not indicated on the drawings, notify the Contracting Officer prior to further work in that area.
B. Chain Link Fencing
Remove chain link fencing, gates and other related items scheduled for removal and transport to recycling facility or designated disposal area.
C. Electrical Equipment and Fixtures
Disconnect grounding circuits at the point of attachment to their distribution system.
1. Electrical Devices
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 02 41 00 Page 76
Remove conductors including wire and nonmetallic sheathed and flexible armored cable, and similar items.
D. Items With Unique/Regulated Disposal Requirements
Remove and dispose of items with unique or regulated disposal requirements in the manner dictated by law or in the most environmentally responsible manner.
3.2 DISPOSITION OF MATERIAL A. Title to Materials
All materials and equipment removed shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from Government property. Title to materials resulting from demolition and deconstruction, and materials and equipment to be removed, is vested in the Contractor upon approval by the Contracting Officer of the Contractor's demolition, deconstruction, and removal procedures, and authorization by the Contracting Officer to begin demolition and deconstruction. The Government will not be responsible for the condition or loss of, or damage to, such property after contract award. Showing for sale or selling materials and equipment on site is prohibited.
B. Unsalvageable and Non-Recyclable Material
Dispose of unsalvageable and non-recyclable noncombustible material in the approved disposal facility. Dispose of unsalvageable and non-recyclable combustible material in the approved sanitary fill area located off the site.
3.3 CLEANUP
Remove and transport the debris in a manner that prevents spillage on streets or adjacent areas. Apply local regulations regarding hauling and disposal.
3.4 DISPOSAL OF REMOVED MATERIALS
Contractor shall divert as much as possible from a landfill. This includes recycling of demolished materials. Contractor shall furnish evidence to the Contracting Officer in the form of recycling tickets, sales receipts, or documentation of storage for any materials that are diverted from the landfill for disposal.
Furnish Contracting Officer with landfill tickets or other similar documentation ensuring that all materials were disposed of properly.
A. Regulation of Removed Materials
Dispose of debris, rubbish, scrap, and other non-salvageable materials resulting from removal operations with all applicable federal, state and local regulations as contractually specified in the Waste Management Plan. Storage of removed materials on the project site is prohibited.
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 78
B. Burning on Government Property
Burning of materials removed from demolished and deconstructed structures will not be permitted on Government property.
C. Removal from Government Property
Transport waste materials removed from demolished and deconstructed structures and waste soil, from Government property for legal disposal.
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 79
SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)
AASHTO M-235 (2005) Standard Specification for
Epoxy Resin Adhesives
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)
ACI 301 (2016) Specifications for Structural Concrete
ACI 302.1R (2015) Guide for Concrete Floor and
Slab Construction
ACI 304R (2000; R 2009) Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete
ACI 305R (2010) Guide to Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306.1 (1990; R 2002) Standard Specification
for Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 306R (2016) Guide to Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 318 (2014; Errata 1-2 2014; Errata 3-5
2015; Errata 6 2016; Errata 7 2017) Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary
ACI SP-66 (2004) ACI Detailing Manual
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A1064/A1064M (2017) Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete
ASTM A615/A615M (2016) Standard Specification for
Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 80
ASTM A934/A934M (2016) Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars
ASTM C1017/C1017M (2013; E 2015) Standard Specification
for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete
ASTM C1077 (2016) Standard Practice for
Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation
ASTM C1157/C1157M (2017) Standard Performance
Specification for Hydraulic Cement
ASTM C1260 (2014) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C143/C143M (2015) Standard Test Method for Slump
of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
ASTM C150/C150M (2017) Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C1602/C1602M (2012) Standard Specification for
Mixing Water Used in Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
ASTM C172/C172M (2014a) Standard Practice for Sampling
Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C173/C173M (2016) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method
ASTM C231/C231M (2017a) Standard Test Method for Air
Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
ASTM C260/C260M (2010a; R 2016) Standard Specification
for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C295/C295M (2012) Petrographic Examination of
Aggregates for Concrete
ASTM C31/C31M (2017) Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
ASTM C311/C311M (2013) Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or
Natural Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland-Cement Concrete
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 81
ASTM C33/C33M (2016) Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C39/C39M (2017b) Standard Test Method for
Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens
ASTM C42/C42M (2013) Standard Test Method for
Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete
ASTM C494/C494M (2017) Standard Specification for
Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C595/C595M (2017) Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
ASTM C618 (2012a) Standard Specification for
Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
ASTM C78/C78M (2016) Standard Test Method for
Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading)
ASTM C94/C94M (2017a) Standard Specification for
Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C989/C989M (2017) Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars
ASTM D5759 (2012) Characterization of Coal Fly
Ash and Clean Coal Combustion Fly Ash for Potential Uses
CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)
CRSI 10MSP (2009; 28th Ed) Manual of Standard
Practice 1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. "Cementitious material" as used herein must include all portland
cement, pozzolan, fly ash, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and [silica fume].
b. "Exposed to public view" means situated so that it can be seen
from eye level from a public location after completion of the building. A public location is accessible to persons not responsible for operation or maintenance of the building.
c. "Chemical admixtures" are materials in the form of powder or
fluids that are added to the concrete to give it certain characteristics not obtainable with plain concrete mixes.
d. "Supplementary cementing materials" (SCM) include coal fly ash,
[silica fume, ]granulated blast-furnace slag, natural or calcined
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 82
pozzolans, and ultra-fine coal ash when used in such proportions to replace the portland cement that result in improvement to sustainability and durability and reduced cost.
e. "Design strength" (f'c) is the specified compressive strength of
concrete at time(s) specified in this section to meet structural design criteria.
f. "Mass Concrete" is any concrete system that approaches a maximum
temperature of 158 degrees F within the first 72 hours of placement. In addition, it includes all concrete elements with a section thickness of 3 feet or more regardless of temperature.
g. "Mixture proportioning" is the process of designing concrete
mixture proportions to enable it to meet the strength, service life and constructability requirements of the project while minimizing the initial and life-cycle cost.
h. "Mixture proportions" are the masses or volumes of individual
ingredients used to make a unit measure (cubic meter or cubic yard) of concrete.
i. "Pozzolan" is a siliceous or siliceous and aluminous material,
which in itself possesses little or no cementitious value but will, in finely divided form and in the presence of moisture, chemically react with calcium hydroxide at ordinary temperatures to form compounds possessing cementitious properties.
j. "Workability (or consistence)" is the ability of a fresh (plastic)
concrete mix to fill the form/mould properly with the desired work (vibration) and without reducing the concrete's quality. Workability depends on water content, chemical admixtures, aggregate (shape and size distribution), cementitious content and age (level of hydration).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Laboratory Accreditation; G
SD-03 Product Data
Cementitious Materials
Concrete Curing Materials
Admixtures
Biodegradable Form Release Agent
Reinforcement; G
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 82
SD-05 Design Data
Concrete Mix Design; G
SD-06 Test Reports
Concrete Mix Design; G
Fly Ash
Pozzolan
Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag
Aggregates
Compressive Strength Tests; G
Slump Tests
Water
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Curing Compound
1.4 MODIFICATION OF REFERENCES
Accomplish work in accordance with ACI publications except as modified herein. Consider the advisory or recommended provisions to be mandatory. Interpret reference to the "Building Official," the "Structural Engineer," and the "Architect/Engineer" to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Follow ACI 301, ACI 304R and ASTM A934/A934M requirements and recommendations. Do not deliver concrete until forms and bonding agent are in place and ready for concrete placement. Do not store concrete curing compounds s with materials that have a high capacity to adsorb volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions. Do not store concrete curing compounds in occupied spaces.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Design Data
1. Concrete Mix Design
Fifteen days minimum prior to concrete placement, submit a mix design for strength and type of concrete. Submit a complete list of materials including type; brand; source and amount of cement, complementary cementitious materials, and admixtures; and applicable reference specifications. Submit mill test and all other test for cement, complementary cementitious materials, aggregates, and admixtures. Provide documentation
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 83
of maximum nominal aggregate size, gradation analysis, percentage retained and passing sieve, and a graph of percentage retained verses sieve size. Provide mix proportion data using at least three different water-cementitious material ratios for each type of mixture, which produce a range of strength encompassing those required for each type of concrete required. If source material changes, resubmit mix proportion data using revised source material. Provide only materials that have been proven by trial mix studies to meet the requirements of this specification, unless otherwise approved in writing by the Contracting Officer. Indicate clearly in the submittal where each mix design is used when more than one mix design is submitted. Resubmit data on concrete components if the qualities or source of components changes. For previously approved concrete mix designs used within the past twelve months, the previous mix design may be re-submitted without further trial batch testing if accompanied by material test data conducted within the last six months. Obtain mix design approval from the contracting officer prior to concrete placement.
B. Test Reports
1. Fly Ash and Pozzolan
Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C618 for fly ash and pozzolan. Submit test results performed within 6 months of submittal date.
2. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag
Submit test results in accordance with ASTM C989/C989M for ground granulated blast-furnace slag. Submit test results performed within 6 months of submittal date.
3. Aggregates
ASTM C1260 for potential alkali-silica reactions, ASTM C295/C295M for petrographic analysis.
C. Laboratory Accreditation
Laboratory and testing facilities must be provided by and at the expense of the Contractor. The laboratories performing the tests must be accredited in accordance with ASTM C1077, including ASTM C78/C78M and ASTM C1260. The accreditation must be current and must include the required test methods, as specified. Furthermore, the testing must comply with the following requirements:
a. Aggregate Testing and Mix Proportioning: Aggregate testing and
mixture proportioning studies must be performed by an accredited laboratory and under the direction of a [registered professional engineer in a U.S. state or territory competent in concrete materials who is competent in concrete materials and
must sign all reports and designs.
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 84
b. Acceptance Testing: Furnish all materials, labor, and facilities required for molding, curing, testing, and
protecting test specimens at the site and in the laboratory. Furnish and maintain boxes or other facilities suitable for
storing and curing the specimens at the site while in the mold within the temperature range stipulated by ASTM C31/C31M.
c. Contractor Quality Control: All sampling and testing must be
performed by an approved, offsite, independent, accredited laboratory.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM WORK
Design and construct form work to ensure that the finished concrete will conform accurately to the indicated dimensions, lines, and elevations, and within the tolerances specified. Forms must be of wood or steel, straight, of sufficient strength to resist springing during depositing and consolidating concrete. Wood forms must be surfaced plank, 2 inches nominal thickness, straight and free from warp, twist, loose knots, splits or other defects. Wood forms must have a nominal length of 10 feet. Radius bends may be formed with 3/4 inch boards, laminated to the required thickness. Steel forms must be channel-formed sections with a flat top surface and with welded braces at each end and at not less than two intermediate points. Ends of steel forms must be interlocking and self-aligning. Steel forms must include flexible forms for radius forming, corner forms, form spreaders, and fillers. Steel forms must have a nominal length of 10 feet with a minimum of 3 welded stake pockets per form. Stake pins must be solid steel rods with chamfered heads and pointed tips designed for use with steel forms.
2.2 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
A. Ready-Mix Concrete
Provide concrete that meets the requirements of ASTM C94/C94M and as tated below.
Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:
a. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days.
b. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.50.
c. Slump Limit: 4 inches for concrete with verified slump of 2
to 4 inches before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch.
d. Air Content: 5 to 7 percent, at point of delivery for 1-1/2
inch nominal maximum aggregate size.
Ready-mixed concrete manufacturer must provide duplicate delivery tickets with each load of concrete delivered. Provide delivery tickets with the following information in addition to that required by ASTM C94/C94M:
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 85
Type and brand cement
Cement and complementary cementitious materials content in 94-pound bags per cubic yard of concrete
Maximum size of aggregate
Amount and brand name of admixtures
Total water content expressed by water cementitious material ratio
B. Concrete Curing Materials
1. Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound
ASTM C309, white pigmented, Type 2, Class B, free of paraffin or petroleum.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars
ACI 301 unless otherwise specified. Use deformed steel. ASTM A615/A615M with the bars marked A, Grade 60. Cold drawn wire used for spiral reinforcement must conform to ASTM A1064/A1064M. Submit mill certificates for reinforcing bars.
B. Welded Wire Reinforcement
ASTM A1064/A1064M.
C. Reinforcing Bar Supports
Supports include bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices necessary for proper spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place.
Legs of supports in contact with formwork must be hot-dip galvanized, or plastic coated after fabrication, or stainless- steel bar supports.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Materials
For exposed concrete, use one manufacturer and one source for each type of cement, ground slag, fly ash, and pozzolan.
1. Fly Ash
ASTM C618, Class F, except that the maximum allowable loss on ignition must not exceed 3 percent. Class F fly ash for use in mitigating Alkali-Silica Reactivity must have a Calcium Oxide (CaO) content of less than 8 percent and a total equivalent alkali content less than 1.5 percent.
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 86
Add with cement. Fly ash content must be a minimum of 35 percent by weight of cementitious material, provided the fly ash does not reduce the amount of cement in the concrete mix below the minimum requirements of local building codes. Where the use of fly ash cannot meet the minimum level, provide the maximum amount of fly ash permittable that meets the code requirements for cement content. Report the chemical analysis of the fly ash in accordance with ASTM C311/C311M. Evaluate and classify fly ash in accordance with ASTM D5759.
2. Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan
Natural pozzolan must be raw or calcined and conform to ASTM C618, Class N, including the optional requirements for uniformity and effectiveness in controlling Alkali-Silica reaction and must have an ignition loss not exceeding 3 percent. Class N pozzolan for use in mitigating Alkali-Silica Reactivity must have a Calcium Oxide (CaO) content of less than 13 percent and total equivalent alkali content less than 3 percent.
3. Ultra Fine Fly Ash and Ultra Fine Pozzolan
Ultra Fine Fly Ash (UFFA) and Ultra Fine Pozzolan (UFP) must conform to ASTM C618, Class F or N, and the following additional requirements:
a. The strength activity index at 28 days of age must be at
least 95 percent of the control specimens.
b. The average particle size must not exceed 6 microns.
c. The sum of SiO2 + Al2O3 + Fe2O3 must be greater than 77 percent.
4. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag
ASTM C989/C989M, Grade 100. Slag content must be a minimum of 25 percent by weight of cementitious material.
5. Portland Cement
Provide cement that conforms to ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II, low alkali with tri-calcium aluminates (C3A) content less than 10 percent and a maximum cement-alkali content of 0.80 percent Na2Oe (sodium oxide) equivalent.. Use one brand and type of cement for formed concrete having exposed-to-view finished surfaces.
6. Blended Cements
Blended cement must conform to ASTM C595/C595M and ASTM C1157/C1157M, Type IP or IS, including the optional requirement for mortar expansion [and sulfate soundness] and consist of a mixture of ASTM C150/C150M Type I, or Type II cement and a complementary cementing material. The slag added to the Type IS
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 87
blend must be ASTM C989/C989M ground granulated blast-furnace slag. The pozzolan added to the Type IP blend must be ASTM C618 Class F and must be inter-ground with the cement clinker. The manufacturer must state in writing that the amount of pozzolan in the finished cement will not vary more than plus or minus 5 mass percent of the finished cement from lot-to-lot or within a lot. The percentage and type of mineral admixture used in the blend must not change from that submitted for the aggregate evaluation and mixture proportioning.
B. Water
Water must comply with the requirements of ASTM C1602/C1602M. Minimize the amount of water in the mix. Improve workability by adjusting the grading rather than by adding water. Water must be [potable][from rainwater collection][from graywater][from recycled water]; free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, salts, organic materials, or other substances deleterious to concrete. Submit test report showing water complies with ASTM C1602/C1602M.
C. Aggregates
ASTM C33/C33M, except as modified herein. Furnish aggregates for exposed concrete surfaces from one source. Provide aggregates that do not contain any substance which may be deleteriously reactive with the alkalies in the cement. Submit test report showing compliance with ASTM C33/C33M.
Aggregates must not possess properties or constituents that are known to have specific unfavorable effects in concrete when tested in accordance with ASTM C295/C295M.
D. Admixtures
ASTM C494/C494M: Type A, water reducing; Type B, retarding; Type C, accelerating; Type D, water-reducing and retarding; and Type E, water-reducing and accelerating admixture. Do not use calcium chloride admixtures. Submit product data for admixtures used in concrete.
1. Air-Entraining
ASTM C260/C260M.
2. High Range Water Reducer (HRWR) (Superplasticizers)
ASTM C494/C494M, Type F and ASTM C1017/C1017M.
E. Bonding Agent
Provide two component material formulated to meet the requirements of ASTM C881/C881M, Type I, II, and V, Grade-2 and Class C and AASHTO M-235.
F. Joint Filler
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 88
Provide joint filler as specified in Section 32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS.
G. Joint Sealants
Provide joint sealant as specified in Section 32 01 19 FIELD MOLDED SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS.
H. Biodegradable Form Release Agent
Provide form release agent that is colorless, biodegradable, and water-based, with a low (maximum of 55 grams/liter (g/l)) VOC content. A minimum of 85 percent of the total product must be biobased material. Provide product that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. Provide form release agent that does not contain diesel fuel, petroleum-based lubricating oils, waxes, or kerosene. Submit documentation indicating type of biobased material in product and biobased content. Indicate relative dollar value of biobased content products to total dollar value of products included in project.
I. White Pigmented Membrane-Forming Curing Compound
White pigmented membrane-forming curing compound must conform to ASTM C309, Type 2.
2.5 CONCRETE PROTECTION MATERIALS
Concrete protection materials must be a linseed oil mixture of equal parts, by volume, of linseed oil and either mineral spirits, naphtha, or turpentine. At the option of the Contractor, commercially prepared linseed oil mixtures, formulated specifically for application to concrete to provide protection against the action of deicing chemicals may be used, except that emulsified mixtures are not acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
Check field dimensions before beginning installation. If dimensions vary too much from design dimensions for proper installation, notify Contracting Officer and wait for instructions before beginning installation.
3.2 PREPARATION OF EXISITNG PAVEMENTS
Determine quantity of concrete needed and minimize the production of excess concrete. Designate locations or uses for potential excess concrete before the concrete is poured.
A. General
Surfaces against which concrete is to be placed must be free of debris, loose material, standing water, snow, ice, and other deleterious substances before start of concrete placing.
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 89
Clean the surface by waterblasting, blowing with compressed air, sweeping, and vacuums. Use waterblasting to remove all traces of sealer, oils, grease, rust, and other contaminants.
Remove standing water without washing over freshly deposited concrete. Divert flow of water through side drains provided for such purpose.
B. Disposal of Debris
Sweep pavement surface to remove excess dirt, water, sand, and other debris using vacuum sweepers or hand brooms. Remove the debris immediately to an approved disposal site.
C. Bonding Agent
Prior to placing concrete, wash the previously prepared surfaces with a high pressure water jet followed by an air jet to remove free water on the repair surface.
Apply in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3 FORMS
Set forms to the indicated alignment, grade and dimensions. Hold forms rigidly in place at intervals not to exceed 4 feet. Corners, deep sections, and radius bends must have additional stakes and braces, as required. Clamps, spreaders, and braces must be used where required to ensure rigidity in the forms. Forms must be removed without injuring the concrete. Bars or heavy tools must not be used against the concrete in removing the forms. Concrete found defective after form removal must be promptly and satisfactorily repaired.
A. Coating
Before concrete placement, coat the contact surfaces of forms with a form release agent. Wood forms may, instead, be thoroughly wetted with water before concrete is placed, except that with probable freezing temperatures, oiling is mandatory
B. Grade and Alignment
Check and correct grade elevations and alignment of the forms immediately before placing the concrete.
3.4 REINFORCEMENT
A. Setting Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be positioned on suitable chairs or precast concrete blocks, spaced at intervals required by size of reinforcement, to keep reinforcement the minimum height specified above the underside of the pavement, prior to concrete placement. At expansion, contraction and construction joints, place the reinforcement as indicated. Reinforcement, when placed in concrete, shall be free of mud, oil, scale or other foreign materials. Place reinforcement accurately and wire securely. The
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 90
laps at splices shall be 12 inches minimum and the distances from ends and sides of slabs and joints shall be as indicated.
Provide reinforcement that is supported and secured together to prevent displacement by construction loads or by placing of wet concrete, and as follows:
Provide supports for reinforcing bars that are sufficient in number and have sufficient strength to carry the reinforcement they support, and in accordance with ACI 318, ACI SP-66 and CRSI 10MSP. Do not use supports to support runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.
Equip supports on ground and similar surfaces with sand-plates.
Support welded wire reinforcement as required for reinforcing bars.
Secure reinforcements to supports by means of tie wire. Wire must be black, soft iron wire, not less than 16 gage.
Reinforcement must be accurately placed, securely tied at intersections, and held in position during placing of concrete by spacers, chairs, or other approved supports. Point wire-tie ends away from the form. Unless otherwise indicated, numbers, type, and spacing of supports must conform to ACI SP-66.
Bending of reinforcing bars partially embedded in concrete is permitted only as specified in ACI SP-66 and ACI 318.
B. Spacing of Reinforcing Bars
Spacing must be as indicated. If not indicated, spacing must be in accordance with the ACI 318 and ACI SP-66.
Reinforcing bars may be relocated to avoid interference with other reinforcement, or with conduit, pipe, or other embedded items. If any reinforcing bar is moved a distance exceeding one bar diameter or specified placing tolerance, resulting rearrangement of reinforcement is subject to preapproval by the Contracting Officer.
C. Concrete Protection for Reinforcement
Concrete protection must be in accordance with the ACI 318 and ACI SP-66.
3.5 BATCHING, MEASURING, MIXING, AND TRANSPORTING CONCRETE
ASTM C94/C94M, ACI 301, ACI 302.1R and ACI 304R, except as modified herein. Batching equipment must be such that the concrete ingredients are consistently measured within the following tolerances: 1 percent for cement and water, 2 percent for aggregate, and 3 percent for admixtures. Furnish mandatory batch ticket information for each load of ready mix concrete.
A. Measuring
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 91
Make measurements at intervals as specified in paragraphs SAMPLING and TESTING.
B. Mixing
ASTM C94/C94M, ACI 301 and ACI 304R. Machine mix concrete. Begin mixing within 30 minutes after the cement has been added to the aggregates. Place concrete within 90 minutes of either addition of mixing water to cement and aggregates or addition of cement to aggregates if the air temperature is less than 84 degrees F. Reduce mixing time and place concrete within 60 minutes if the air temperature is greater than 84 degrees F except as follows: if set retarding admixture is used and slump requirements can be met, limit for placing concrete may remain at 90 minutes. Additional water may be added, provided that both the specified maximum slump and water-cementitious material ratio are not exceeded and the required concrete strength is still met. When additional water is added, an additional 30 revolutions of the mixer at mixing speed is required. If the entrained air content falls below the specified limit, add a sufficient quantity of admixture to bring the entrained air content within the specified limits. Dissolve admixtures in the mixing water and mix in the drum to uniformly distribute the admixture throughout the batch. Do not reconstitute concrete that has begun to solidify.
C. Transporting
Transport concrete from the mixer to the forms as rapidly as practicable. Prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. Clean transporting equipment thoroughly before each batch. Do not use aluminum pipe or chutes. Remove concrete which has segregated in transporting and dispose of as directed.
D. Workability
Maintain the slump of the concrete at the lowest practicable value, not exceeding the value specified in Paragraph CONCRETE MIX DESIGN.
3.6 PLACING CONCRETE
Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5.
A. Pavement
Concrete must be placed to the section required in a single lift. Consolidation must be achieved by using approved mechanical vibrators.
B. Cold Weather
ACI 306.1. Do not allow concrete temperature to decrease below 50 degrees F. Obtain approval prior to placing concrete when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or when concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing temperatures within 24 hours. Cover concrete and provide sufficient heat to maintain 50 degrees F minimum adjacent to both the formwork and the structure while
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 92
curing. Limit the rate of cooling to 37 degrees F in any 1 hour and 50 degrees F per 24 hours after heat application.
C. Hot Weather
Maintain required concrete temperature using Figure 4.2 in ACI 305R to prevent the evaporation rate from exceeding 0.2 pound of water per square foot of exposed concrete per hour. Cool ingredients before mixing or use other suitable means to control concrete temperature and prevent rapid drying of newly placed concrete. Shade the fresh concrete as soon as possible after placing. Start curing when the surface of the fresh concrete is sufficiently hard to permit curing without damage. Provide water hoses, pipes, spraying equipment, and water hauling equipment, where job site is remote to water source, to maintain a moist concrete surface throughout the curing period. Provide burlap cover or other suitable, permeable material with fog spray or continuous wetting of the concrete when weather conditions prevent the use of either liquid membrane curing compound or impervious sheets.
3.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT
Provide as specified in the Waste Management Plan and as follows.
A. Mixing Equipment
Before concrete pours, designate an area for cleaning out concrete mixing trucks. Minimize water used to wash equipment.
B. Hardened, Cured Waste Concrete
Hardened, cured waste concrete shall be removed from Government property and taken to an acceptable recycling facility.
3.8 FINISHING
ACI 301 and ACI 302.1R, unless otherwise specified. Steel trowel and fine-broom finish concrete pavements. Where straightedge measurements are specified, Contractor must provide straightedge.
A. Finish
Place, consolidate, and immediately strike off concrete to obtain proper contour, grade, and elevation before bleedwater appears. Permit concrete to attain a set sufficient for floating and supporting the weight of the finisher and equipment. If bleedwater is present prior to floating the surface, drag the excess water off or remove by absorption with porous materials. Do not use dry cement to absorb bleedwater.
1. Floated
Use for exterior slabs where not otherwise specified. Finish concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5 for a floated finish.
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 93
2. Broomed
Use on surfaces of exterior concrete pavements. Finish concrete in accordance with ACI 301 Section 5 for a broomed finish.
3. Pavement
Screed the concrete with a template advanced with a combined longitudinal and crosswise motion. Maintain a slight surplus of concrete ahead of the template. After screeding, float the concrete longitudinally. Use a straightedge to check slope and flatness; correct and refloat as necessary. Obtain final finish by brooming. Round edges and joints with an edger having a radius of 1/8 inch.
3.9 CURING AND PROTECTION
A. General Requirements
Protect concrete against loss of moisture and rapid temperature changes for at least 7 days from the beginning of the curing operation. Protect unhardened concrete from rain and flowing water. All equipment needed for adequate curing and protection of the concrete must be on hand and ready for use before actual concrete placement begins. Protection must be provided as necessary to prevent cracking of the pavement due to temperature changes during the curing period.
B. Membrane Curing Method
A uniform coating of white-pigmented membrane-curing compound must be applied to the entire exposed surface of the concrete as soon after finishing as the free water has disappeared from the finished surface. Formed surfaces must be coated immediately after the forms are removed and in no case longer than 1 hour after the removal of forms. Concrete must not be allowed to dry before the application of the membrane. If drying has occurred, the surface of the concrete must be moistened with a fine spray of water and the curing compound applied as soon as the free water disappears. Curing compound must be applied in two coats by hand- operated pressure sprayers at a coverage of approximately 200 square feet/gallon for the total of both coats. The second coat must be applied in a direction approximately at right angles to the direction of application of the first coat. The compound must form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and must be free from pinholes or other imperfections. If pinholes, abrasion, or other discontinuities exist, an additional coat must be applied to the affected areas within 30 minutes. Concrete surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after the curing compound has been applied must be resprayed by the method and at the coverage specified above. Areas where the curing compound is damaged by subsequent construction operations within the curing period must be resprayed. Necessary precautions must be taken to ensure that the concrete is properly cured at sawed joints, and that no curing compound enters the joints. The top of the joint opening and the
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 94
joint groove at exposed edges must be tightly sealed before the concrete in the region of the joint is resprayed with curing compound. The method used for sealing the joint groove must prevent loss of moisture from the joint during the entire specified curing period. Approved standby facilities for curing concrete pavement must be provided at a location accessible to the jobsite for use in the event of mechanical failure of the spraying equipment or other conditions that might prevent correct application of the membrane-curing compound at the proper time. Concrete surfaces to which membrane-curing compounds have been applied must be adequately protected during the entire curing period from pedestrian and vehicular traffic, except as required for joint-sawing operations and surface tests, and from other possible damage to the continuity of the membrane.
C. Temperature of Concrete During Curing
When temperature of atmosphere is 41 degrees F and below, maintain temperature of concrete at not less than 55 degrees F throughout concrete curing period or 45 degrees F when the curing period is measured by maturity. When necessary, make arrangements before start of concrete placing for heating, covering, insulation, or housing as required to maintain specified temperature and moisture conditions for concrete during curing period.
When the temperature of atmosphere is 80 degrees F and above or during other climatic conditions which cause too rapid drying of concrete, make arrangements before start of concrete placing for installation of wind breaks, of shading, and for fog spraying, wet sprinkling, or moisture-retaining covering of light color as required to protect concrete during curing period.
Changes in temperature of concrete must be uniform and not exceed 37 degrees F in any 1 hour nor 80 degrees F in any 24-hour period.
D. Protection from Mechanical Injury
During curing period, protect concrete from damaging mechanical disturbances, particularly load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibration and from damage caused by rain or running water.
E. Protection After Curing
Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage by construction operations. Repair damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction. Concrete that is damaged must be removed and reconstructed for the entire length between regularly scheduled joints. Refinishing the damaged portion will not be acceptable. Removed damaged portions must be disposed of as directed.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Submit copies of all test reports within 24 hours of completion of the test.
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 95
A. Sampling
ASTM C172/C172M. Collect samples of fresh concrete to perform tests specified. ASTM C31/C31M for making test specimens.
B. General Requirements
Perform the inspection and tests described and meet the specified requirements for inspection details and frequency of testing. Based upon the results of these inspections and tests, take the action and submit reports as required below, and additional tests to ensure that the requirements of these specifications are met.
C. Concrete Testing
1. Slump Tests
ASTM C143/C143M. Take concrete samples during concrete placement/discharge. The maximum slump may be increased as specified with the addition of an approved admixture provided that the water-cementitious material ratio is not exceeded. Perform tests at commencement of concrete placement, when test cylinders are made, and for each batch (minimum) or every 20 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete. Additional tests must be performed when excessive variation in the workability of the concrete is noted.
2. Temperature Tests
Test the concrete delivered and the concrete in the forms. Perform tests in hot or cold weather conditions (below 50 degrees F and above 80 degrees F) for each batch (minimum) or every 20 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete, until the specified temperature is obtained, and whenever test cylinders and slump tests are made.
3. Compressive Strength Tests
ASTM C39/C39M. Make six 6 inch by 12 inch test cylinders for each set of tests in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M, ASTM C172/C172M and applicable requirements of ACI 305R and ACI 306R. Take precautions to prevent evaporation and loss of water from the specimen. Test two cylinders at 7 days, two cylinders at 28 days, and hold two cylinder in reserve. Samples of concrete placed each day must be taken not less than once a day nor less than once for every 50 cubic yards of concrete, or fraction thereof, placed. Each strength test result must be the average of two cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28 days, unless otherwise specified or approved. Concrete compressive tests must meet the requirements of ACI 318 Section 5.6. Concrete specified on the basis of compressive strength will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength, and no individual strength test result falls below the specified strength by more than 500 psi. Retest locations represented by erratic core strengths. Where retest does not meet concrete
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 96
compressive strength requirements submit a mitigation or remediation plan for review and approval by the contracting officer. Repair core holes with nonshrink grout. Match color and finish of adjacent concrete.
4. Air Content
ASTM C173/C173M or ASTM C231/C231M for normal weight concrete. Test air-entrained concrete for air content at the same frequency as specified for slump tests. Additional tests must be made when excessive variation in concrete workability is reported by the placing foreman or the Government inspector. If results are out of tolerance, the placing foreman must be notified and he must take appropriate action to have the air content corrected at the plant. Additional tests for air content will be performed on each truckload of material until such time as the air content is within the tolerance specified.
5. Strength of Concrete
The strength of the concrete structure will be considered to be deficient if any of the following conditions are identified:
Failure to meet compressive strength tests as evaluated
Reinforcement not conforming to requirements specified
Concrete which differs from required dimensions or location in such a manner as to reduce strength
Concrete curing and protection of concrete against extremes of temperature during curing, not conforming to requirements specified
Concrete subjected to damaging mechanical disturbances, particularly load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibration
Poor workmanship likely to result in deficient strength
Where the strength of the concrete structure is considered deficient submit a mitigation or remediation plan for review and approval by the contracting officer.
6. Non-Conforming Materials
Factors that indicate that there are non-conforming materials include (but not limited to) excessive compressive strength, inadequate compressive strength, excessive slump, excessive voids and honeycombing, concrete delivery records that indicate excessive time between mixing and placement, or excessive water was added to the mixture during delivery and placement. Any of these indicators alone are sufficient reason for the Contracting Officer to request additional sampling and testing.
Investigations into non-conforming materials must be conducted at the Contractor's expense. The Contractor must be responsible
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 97
for the investigation and must make written recommendations to adequately mitigate or remediate the non-conforming material. The Contracting Officer may accept, accept with reduced payment, require mitigation, or require removal and replacement of non-conforming material at no additional cost to the Government.
7. Testing Concrete for Strength
When there is evidence that strength of concrete in place does not meet specification requirements or there are non-conforming materials, make cores drilled from hardened concrete for compressive strength determination in accordance with ASTM C42/C42M, and as follows:
Take at least three representative cores from each member or area of concrete-in-place that is considered potentially deficient. Location of cores will be determined by the Contracting Officer.
Test cores after moisture conditioning in accordance with ASTM C42/C42M if concrete they represent is more than superficially wet under service.
Air dry cores, (60 to 80 degrees F with relative humidity less than 60 percent) for 7 days before test and test dry if concrete they represent is dry under service conditions.
Strength of cores from each member or area are considered satisfactory if their average is equal to or greater than 85 percent of the 28-day design compressive strength of the class of concrete.
Fill core holes solid with patching mortar and finished to match adjacent concrete surfaces.
Correct concrete work that is found inadequate by core tests in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer.
D. Reinforcement
Inspect reinforcement prior to installation to assure it is free of loose flaky rust, loose scale, oil, mud, or other objectionable material.
E. Surface Evaluation
The finished surface of each category of the completed work must be uniform in color and free of blemishes and form or tool marks.
3.11 REPAIR, REHABILITATION AND REMOVAL
Before the Contracting Officer accepts the structure the Contractor must inspect the structure for cracks, damage and substandard concrete placements that may adversely affect the service life of the structure. A report documenting these defects must be prepared which includes recommendations for repair, removal or remediation must be
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 03 30 00 Page 98
submitted to the Contracting Officer for approval before any corrective work is accomplished.
A. Thickness Deficiency
When measurements indicate that the completed concrete section is deficient in thickness by more than 1/4 inch the deficient section will be removed, between regularly scheduled joints, and replaced.
B. Appearance
Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Contracting Officer and deficiencies in appearance will be identified. Areas which exhibit excessive cracking, discoloration, form marks, or tool marks or which are otherwise inconsistent with the overall appearances of the work must be removed and replaced.
C. Repair of Weak Surfaces
Weak surfaces are defined as mortar-rich, rain-damaged, uncured, or containing exposed voids or deleterious materials. Concrete surfaces with weak surfaces less than 1/4 inch thick must be diamond ground to remove the weak surface. Surfaces containing weak surfaces greater than 1/4 inch thick must be removed and replaced or mitigated in a manner acceptable to the Contracting Officer.
D. Failure of Quality Assurance Test Results
Proposed mitigation efforts by the Contractor must be approved by the Contracting Officer prior to proceeding.
-- End of Section --
Section 05 50 13 Page 78
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
SECTION 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A47/A47M (1999; R 2014) Standard Specification
for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
ASTM A53/A53M (2012) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless
ASTM D1187/D1187M (1997; E 2011; R 2011) Asphalt-Base
Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal
MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE (MPI)
MPI 79 (Oct 2009) Alkyd Anti-Corrosive Metal
Primer
SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)
SSPC SP 3 (1982; E 2004) Power Tool Cleaning
SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3 (2007) Commercial Blast Cleaning
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Bollards/Pipe Guards 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
Protect from corrosion, deformation, and other types of damage. Store items in an enclosed area free from contact with soil and weather. Remove and replace damaged items with new items.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS
Section 05 50 13 Page 79
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Provide exposed fastenings of compatible materials (avoid contact of dissimilar metals). Coordinate color and finish with the material to which fastenings are applied.
A. Steel Pipe
Provide in accordance with ASTM A53/A53M, Type E or S, Grade B. B. Fittings for Steel Pipe
Provide standard malleable iron fittings in accordance with ASTM A47/A47M.
2.2 FABRICATION FINISHES A. Shop Cleaning and Painting
1. Surface Preparation
Blast clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP 6/NACE No.3. Surfaces that will be exposed in spaces above ceiling or in attic spaces, crawl spaces, furred spaces, and chases may be cleaned in accordance with SSPC SP 3 in lieu of being blast cleaned. Wash cleaned surfaces which become contaminated with rust, dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants with solvents until thoroughly clean. Steel to be embedded in concrete must be free of dirt and grease prior to embed. Do not paint or galvanize bearing surfaces, including contact surfaces within slip critical joints. Shop coat these surfaces with rust prevention.
2. Pretreatment, Priming and Painting
Apply pre-treatment, primer, and paint in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
2.3 BOLLARDS/PIPE GUARDS
Provide 8 inch Schedule 80, steel pipe in accordance with ASTM A53/A53M. Anchor posts in concrete as indicated and fill solidly with concrete with minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Install items at locations indicated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Verify all field dimensions prior to fabrication. Include materials and parts necessary to complete each assembly, whether indicated or not. Miss-alignment and miss-sizing of holes for fasteners is cause for rejection. Conceal fastenings where practicable. Joints exposed to weather must be watertight.
3.2 WORKMANSHIP
Provide miscellaneous metalwork that is true and accurate in shape, size, and profile. Make angles and lines continuous and straight. Make curves consistent, smooth and unfaceted. Provide continuous welding
Section 05 50 13 Page 80
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
along the entire area of contact except where tack welding is permitted. Do not tack weld exposed connections. Unless otherwise indicated and approved, provide a smooth finish on exposed surfaces. Provide countersunk rivets where exposed. Provide coped and mitered corner joints aligned flush and without gaps.
3.3 ANCHORAGE, FASTENINGS, AND CONNECTIONS
Provide anchorage as necessary, whether indicated or not, for fastening miscellaneous metal items securely in place. Include slotted inserts, expansion shields, powder-driven fasteners, toggle bolts (when approved for concrete), through bolts for masonry, headed shear studs, machine and carriage bolts for steel, through bolts, lag bolts, and screws for wood. Do not use wood plugs. Provide non-ferrous attachments for non- ferrous metal. Provide exposed fastenings of compatible materials (avoid contact of dissimilar metals), that generally match in color and finish the surfaces to which they are applied. Conceal fastenings where practicable. Provide all fasteners flush with the surfaces they fasten, unless indicated otherwise.
3.4 BUILT-IN WORK
Where necessary and not otherwise indicated, form built-in metal work for anchorage with concrete or masonry. Provide built-in metal work in ample time for securing in place as the work progresses.
3.5 DISSIMILAR METALS
Where dissimilar metals are in contact, protect surfaces with a coating in accordance with MPI 79 to prevent galvanic or corrosive action. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete, plaster, mortar, masonry, wood, or absorptive materials subject to wetting, protect in accordance with ASTM D1187/D1187M, asphalt-base emulsion. Clean surfaces with metal shavings from installation at the end of each work day.
3.6 PREPARATION A. Material Coatings and Surfaces
Remove rust preventive coating just prior to field erection, using a remover approved by the metal manufacturer. Surfaces, when assembled, must be free of rust, grease, dirt and other foreign matter.
B. Environmental Conditions
Do not clean or paint surfaces when damp or exposed to foggy or rainy weather, when metallic surface temperature is less than minus 5 degrees F above the dew point of the surrounding air, or when surface temperature is below 45 degrees F or over 95 degrees F, unless approved by the Contracting Officer. Metal surfaces to be painted must be dry for a minimum of 48 hours prior to the application of primer or paint.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF BOLLARDS/PIPE GUARDS
Section 05 50 13 Page 81
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Set bollards/pipe guards vertically in concrete piers. Fill hollow cores with concrete having a compressive strength of 3000 psi.
-- End of Section --
Section 09 06 00 Page 82
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
SECTION 09 06 00 SCHEDULES FOR FINISHES
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY
This section covers only the color of exterior and interior materials and products that are exposed to view in the finished construction. The word "color", as used herein, includes surface color and pattern. Requirements for quality, product specifications, and method of installation are covered in other appropriate sections of the specifications. Specific locations where the various materials are required are shown on the drawings if not identified in this specification. Items not designated for color in this section may be specified in other sections. When color is not designated for items, propose a color for approval.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 COLOR SCHEDULE
The color schedule information provided in the following paragraphs lists the colors, patterns and textures required for exterior finishes, including both factory applied and field applied colors. Where color is shown as being specific to one manufacturer, an equivalent color by another manufacturer may be submitted for approval. Manufacturers and materials specified are not intended to limit the selection of equal colors from other manufacturers. In the case of difference between the drawings and specifications, colors identified in this specification govern.
2.2 EXTERIOR FINISHES A. Exterior Trim
Provide exterior trim to match the colors listed below.
1. Bollards
Force Protection: Safety Yellow and Black PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used
-- End of Section --
Section 26 00 00.00 20 Page 83
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
SECTION 26 00 00.00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D709 (2013) Laminated Thermosetting Materials
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 100 (2000; Archived) The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms
IEEE C2 (2012; Errata 1 2012; INT 1-4 2012;
Errata 2 2013; INT 5-7 2013; INT 8-10 2014; INT 11 2015) National Electrical Safety Code
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA 250 (2014) Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70 (2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2 2013; Errata 2 2013; AMD 3 2014; Errata 3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National Electrical Code
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
This section applies to all sections of Division 26 and 33, ELECTRICAL and UTILITIES, of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the individual sections. This section has been incorporated into, and thus, does not apply to, and is not referenced in the following sections.
Section 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 1.3 DEFINITIONS
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, shall be as defined in IEEE 100.
Section 26 00 00.00 20 Page 84
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
b. The technical sections referred to herein are those specification sections that describe products, installation procedures, and equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of submittal types.
c. The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in
PART 2 - PRODUCTS and PART 3 - EXECUTION of the technical sections that describe products, systems, installation procedures, equipment, and test methods.
1.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 120/240volts secondary, single phase, three wire. Final connections to the power distribution system at the existing LP1 shall be made by the Contractor as directed by the Contracting Officer.
1.5 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION
Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must conform to the following additional requirements as applicable.
A. Shop Drawings (SD-02)
Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation. Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment. Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices.
B. Product Data (SD-03)
Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "shall" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.
B. Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid
Section 26 00 00.00 20 Page 85
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
opening. The 2-year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2- year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items shall be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section.
1. Alternative Qualifications
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.
2. Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used, unless specified otherwise.
1.7 WARRANTY
The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract.
1.8 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. The operating instructions shall include the following:
a. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each
principal system and item of equipment.
b. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown procedures.
c. Safety precautions.
d. The procedure in the event of equipment failure.
e. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of
each system or item of equipment.
Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures. Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.
1.9 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATE
Section 26 00 00.00 20 Page 86
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable.
1.10 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES
ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device; as specified in the technical sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and, when applicable, the position. Nameplates shall be melamine plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core. Surface shall be matte finish. Corners shall be square. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2.5 inches. Lettering shall be a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.
1.11 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2, NFPA 70, and requirements specified herein.
Electrical materials and equipment shall be new and bear the UL label or be listed in UL Electrical Construction Materials Directory or Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory, wherever standards have been established by the agency. In lieu of the label, the Contractor may submit written certification from any recognized testing agency, adequately equipped and competent to perform such services, that the material or equipment has been tested and conforms to the standards, including the methods of testing used.
1.12 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL
Where specified in the technical sections, furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction to designated Government personnel in the adjustment, operation, and maintenance of the specified systems and equipment, including pertinent safety requirements as required. Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work. Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation. The number of man-days (8 hours per day) of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH
Electrical equipment shall have factory-applied painting systems which shall, as a minimum, meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion- resistance test and the additional requirements specified in the technical sections.
PART 3 EXECUTION
Section 26 00 00.00 20 Page 87
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
3.1 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING
Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria. Painting shall be as specified in the section specifying the associated electrical equipment.
3.2 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING
Provide number, location, and letter designation of nameplates as indicated. Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet- metal screws or two rivets.
-- End of Section --
Section 26 05 00.00 40 Page 88
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
SECTION 26 05 00.00 40 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM D709 (2013) Laminated Thermosetting Materials
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE Stds Dictionary (2009) IEEE Standards Dictionary: Glossary of Terms & Definitions
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
NEMA RN 1 (2005; R 2013) Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit
NEMA TC 2 (2013) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC) Conduit
NEMA TC 3 (2015) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
NEMA VE 1 (2009) Standard for Metal Cable Tray
Systems
NEMA WD 1 (1999; R 2005; R 2010) Standard for General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70 (2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2
2013; Errata 2 2013; AMD 3 2014; Errata 3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National Electrical Code
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1 (2005; Reprint Jul 2012) Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit
UL 1242 (2006; Reprint Mar 2014) Standard for
Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit -- Steel
Section 26 05 00.00 40 Page 89
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
UL 489 (2013; Reprint Mar 2014) Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures
UL 6 (2007; Reprint Nov 2014) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel
UL 797 (2007; Reprint Dec 2012) Electrical Metallic Tubing -- Steel
UL 870 (2008; Reprint Feb 2013) Standard for Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings
1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined in IEEE Stds Dictionary.
b. The technical sections referred to herein are those specification
sections that describe products, installation procedures, and equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of submittal types.
c. Vertical assembly: A vertical assembly is a pole, tower or other
such support, mounting hardware, arms, brackets and the load. Load can be a luminaire, siren, loudspeaker or other device. All components of a vertical assembly will be rated by the manufacturer to withstand 135 mph wind loading.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Material, Equipment, and Fixture Lists; G
SD-03 Product Data
Conduits and Raceways
Wire and Cable
Splices and Connectors
Circuit Breakers
SD-06 Test Reports
Section 26 05 00.00 40 Page 90
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Continuity Test
Insulation Resistance Test
SD-07 Certificates
Certification
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Manufacturer's Instructions
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Submit certification required to install equipment components and system packages.
PART 2 PRODUCTS Submit manufacturer's instructions including special provisions required to install equipment components and system packages. Special provisions detail impedances, hazards and safety precautions. 2.01 EQUIPMENT
Provide the standard cataloged materials and equipment of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products. For material, equipment, and fixture lists submittals, show manufacturer's style or catalog numbers, specification and drawing reference numbers, warranty information, and fabrication site.
A. Conduits and Raceways
1. Rigid Steel Conduit
Ensure rigid steel conduit complies with UL 6 and is galvanized by the hot-dip process. Use polyvinylchloride (PVC) coated rigid steel conduit in accordance with NEMA RN 1, where underground and in corrosive areas, or painted with bitumastic.
Use threaded fittings for rigid steel conduit.
Use solid gaskets. Ensure conduit fittings with blank covers have gaskets, except in clean, dry areas or at the lowest point of a conduit run where drainage is required.
Ensure covers have captive screws and are accessible after the work has been completed.
2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
Ensure EMT is in accordance with UL 797 and is zinc coated steel. Provide zinc-coated couplings and connectors that are raintight, gland compression with insulation throat. Crimp, spring, or setscrew type fittings are not acceptable.
Section 26 05 00.00 40 Page 91
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
3. Flexible Metallic Conduit
Ensure flexible metallic conduit is galvanized steel and complies with UL 1.
Ensure fittings for flexible metallic conduit are specifically designed for such conduit.
Provide liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit with a protective jacket of PVC extruded over a flexible interlocked galvanized steel core to protect wiring against moisture, oil, chemicals, and corrosive fumes.
Specifically design fittings for liquid-tight flexible metallic conduit for such conduit.
4. Intermediate Metal Conduit
Ensure intermediate metal conduit is galvanized steel and complies with UL 1242.
5. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
Ensure rigid nonmetallic conduit complies with NEMA TC 2 and NEMA TC 3 with wall thickness not less than Schedule 40.
6. Wireways and Auxiliary Gutters
Ensure wireways and auxiliary gutters are a minimum 4 by 4-inch trade size conforming to UL 870.
7. Surface Raceways and Assemblies
Ensure surface metal raceways and multi-outlet assemblies conform to NFPA 70. Receptacles conform to NEMA WD 1, Type [5-15R] [5- 20R].
B. Cable Trays
Provide ladder type cable trays conforming to NEMA VE 1. C. Wire and Cable
Use copper 600-volt type THHN THWN, XHHW, or per manufacturer’s recommendations for conductors installed in conduit. Ensure all conductors AWG No. 8 and larger, are stranded. All conductors smaller than AWG No. 8 are solid.
Ensure flexible cable is Type SO and contain a grounding conductor with green insulation.
D. Circuit Breakers
Ensure circuit-breaker interrupting rating is not less than those required by equipment manufacturer's recommendations. Multipole circuit breakers are the common-trip type with a single handle. Molded case circuit breakers are bolt-on type conforming to UL 489.
Section 26 05 00.00 40 Page 92
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
E. Manufacturer's Nameplate
Ensure each item of equipment has a nameplate bearing the manufacturer's name, address, model number, and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place; the nameplate of the distributing agent is not acceptable.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION
Clean and paint conduit, supports, fittings, cabinets, pull boxes, and racks as directed.
Protect metallic materials against corrosion. Provide equipment enclosures with the standard finish by the manufacturer. Do not use aluminum when in contact with earth or concrete and, where connected to dissimilar metal, protect by approved fittings and treatment. Provide hot-dip galvanized ferrous metals such as, but not limited to, anchors, bolts, braces, boxes, bodies, clamps, fittings, guards, nuts, pins, rods, shims, thimbles, washers, and miscellaneous not of corrosion- resistant steel except where other equivalent protective treatment is specifically approved in writing.
3.2 INSTALLATION A. Conduits, Raceways And Fittings
Conduit runs between outlet and outlet, between fitting and fitting, or between outlet and fitting cannot contain more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends, including those bends located immediately at the outlet or fitting.
Do not install crushed or deformed conduit. Avoid trapped conduit runs where possible. Take care to prevent the lodgment of foreign material in the conduit, boxes, fittings, and equipment during the course of construction. Clear any clogged conduit of obstructions or be replaced.
Conduit and raceway runs concealed in or behind walls, above ceilings, or exposed on walls and ceilings 5 feet or more above finished floors and not subject to mechanical damage may be electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
1. Rigid Steel Conduit
Make field-made bends and offsets with approved hickey or conduit bending machine. Use long radius conduit for elbows larger than 2-1/2 inches.
Provide all conduit stubbed-up through concrete floors for connections to free-standing equipment with the exception of motor-control centers, cubicles, and other such items of equipment, with a flush coupling when the floor slab is of sufficient thickness. Otherwise, provide a floor box set flush
Section 26 05 00.00 40 Page 93
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
with the finished floor. For conduits installed for future use, terminate with a coupling and plug set flush with the floor.
2. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
Ground EMT in accordance with NFPA 70, using pressure grounding connectors especially designed for EMT.
3. Flexible Metallic Conduit
Use flexible metallic conduit to connect recessed fixtures from outlet boxes in ceilings, transformers, and other approved assemblies.
Use bonding wires in flexible conduit as specified in NFPA 70, for all circuits. Flexible conduit is not considered a ground conductor.
Make electrical connections to vibration-isolated equipment with flexible metallic conduit.
Use liquidtight flexible metallic conduit in wet and oily locations and to complete the connection to motor-driven equipment.
4. Intermediate Conduit
Make all field-made bends and offsets with approved hickey or conduit bending machine. Use intermediate metal conduit only for indoor installations.
5. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit
Ensure rigid PVC conduit is direct buried.
Install a green insulated copper grounding conductor in conduit with conductors and solidly connect to ground at each end. Size grounding wires in accordance with NFPA 70.
6. Wireway and Auxiliary Gutter
Bolt together straight sections and fittings to provide a rigid, mechanical connection and electrical continuity. Close dead ends of wireways and auxiliary gutters. Plug all unused conduit openings.
Support wireways for overhead distribution and control circuits at maximum 5-foot intervals.
Ensure auxiliary gutters used to supplement wiring spaces for equipment not contained in a single enclosure contains no switches, overcurrent devices, appliances, or apparatus and is not more than 30 feet long.
7. Surface Raceways and Assemblies
Section 26 05 00.00 40 Page 94
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Mount surface raceways plumb and level, with the base and cover secured. Minimum circuit run is three-wire, with one wire designated as ground.
8. Cable Trays
Support cable trays from ceiling hangers, equipment bays, or floor or wall supports. Cable trays may be mounted on equipment racks. Provide support when the free end extends beyond 3 feet. Maximum support spacing is 6 feet. Support trays 10-inches wide or less by one hanger. Support trays greater than 10-inches wide by two hangers. Bond cable trays at splices.
9. Splices and Connectors
Make all splices in AWG No. 8 and smaller with approved insulated electrical type.
Make all splices in AWG No. 6 and larger with indentor crimp-type connectors and compression tools. Wrap joints with an insulating tape that has an insulation and temperature rating equivalent to that of the conductor.
B. Wiring
Use conductors up to and including AWG No. 2 that are manufactured with colored insulating materials. For conductors larger than AWG No. 2, have ends identified with color plastic tape in outlet, pull, or junction boxes.
Splice in accordance with the NFPA 70. Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made and at the equipment terminal of each conductor. Match terminal and conductor identification as indicated.
Where several feeders pass through a common pullbox, tag the feeders to clearly indicate the electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.
C. Boxes and Fittings
Furnish and install pullboxes where necessary in the conduit system to facilitate conductor installation. For conduit runs longer than 100 feet or with more than three right-angle bends, install a pullbox at a convenient intermediate location.
Securely mount boxes and enclosures to the building structure with supporting facilities independent of the conduit entering or leaving the boxes.
D. Field Fabricated Nameplates
Ensure nameplates conform to ASTM D709. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure, relay, switch, and device, as specified in the technical sections or as indicated on the drawings. Each nameplate inscription identifies the function and, when applicable, the position. Provide nameplates that are melamine
Section 26 05 00.00 40 Page 95
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
plastic, 0.125 inch thick, white with black center core and a matte finish surface with square corners. Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core. Minimum size of nameplates is 1 by 2.5 inches. Lettering is a minimum of 0.25 inch high normal block style.
E. Identification Plates And Warnings
Furnish identification plates for all line voltage enclosed circuit breakers, identifying the equipment served, voltage, phase(s) and power source. For circuits 480 volts and above, install conspicuously located warning signs in accordance with OSHA requirements.
F. Posted Operating Instructions
Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed. For operating instructions exposed to the weather, provide weather- resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures. Ensure operating instructions do not fade when exposed to sunlight. Secure instructions to prevent easy removal or peeling.
Ensure each system and principal item of equipment is as specified in the technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel. Include the following information with the operating instructions:
a. Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each
principal system and item of equipment.
b. Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown procedures.
c. Safety precautions.
d. The procedure in the event of equipment failure.
e. Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Submit Test Reports in accordance with referenced standards in this section.
After completion of the installation and splicing, and prior to energizing the conductors, perform wire and cable continuity and insulation tests as herein specified before the conductors are energized.
Provide all necessary test equipment, labor, and personnel to perform the tests, as herein specified.
Isolate completely all wire and cable from all extraneous electrical connections at cable terminations and joints. Use substation and switchboard feeder breakers, disconnects in combination motor starters,
Section 26 05 00.00 40 Page 96
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
circuit breakers in panel boards, and other disconnecting devices to isolate the circuits under test.
Perform insulation-resistance test on each field-installed conductor with respect to ground and adjacent conductors. Applied potential is 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Take readings after 1 minute and until the reading is constant for 15 seconds. Minimum insulation-resistance values is not less than 25 Megohms for 300 volt rated cable and 100 Megohms for 600 volt rated cable. For circuits with conductor sizes 8AWG and smaller insulation resistance testing is not required.
Perform continuity test to insure correct cable connection (i.e. correct phase conductor, grounded conductor, and grounding conductor wiring) end-to end. Repair and re-verify any damages to existing or new electrical equipment resulting from mis-wiring. Receive approval for all repairs from the Contracting Officer prior to commencement of the repair.
Final acceptance requires the successful performance of wire and cable under test. Do not energize any conductor until the final test reports are reviewed and approved by the Contracting Officer.
-- End of Section --
Section 28 13 00 Page 97
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
SECTION 28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROL/TELEPHONE ENTRY SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
System Description
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Operation Instructions
Operation and Maintenance Training
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Warranty 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
Installation shall comply with all applicable codes.
All equipment shall be new, in current production, and the standard products of a manufacturer of telephone entry system equipment.
Manufacturer shall guarantee availability of parts, for a minimum of 7- years from date of shipment.
If required, manufacturer shall be able to demonstrate features, functions and operating characteristics.
System shall be installed by a factory authorized contractor, with technicians specifically trained in this system.
On-site maintenance and repair service shall be available locally and within 4-hours, of notification for emergency condition.
System shall interface with other systems at existing Building 1000 access gate to allow remote PC programming.
Section 28 13 00 Page 98
CYPR152302 Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver, store, and handle materials and products in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and industry standards.
Store products indoors in manufacturer's original containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. Protect from damage.
1.4 WARRANTY
Systems shall include a factory warranty that equipment is free from defects in design, material, manufacturing and operation.
Factory warranty period shall be for two (2) years parts and workmanship; 24-months from date of shipment. Manufacturer shall not be responsible for improper use, handling, or installation of the product.
Installing communications contractor shall guarantee the equipment, wire, cable, and installation for 12-months from date of acceptance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
The system as described herein, is based on the 1800 Series Telephone Entry system manufactured by DoorKing, Inc., Inglewood, California. The 1800 series system specified meets requirements of the specifications and shall be considered as the acceptable Base Bid.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The telephone entry system shall provide "full duplex," (hands-free at guest end) voice communication from the entry location to the Building 1000 telephone. Half duplex or simplex type communication will not be allowed
The system shall be capable of storing up to 1000 user phone numbers.
The system shall be capable of independently controlling a main entry access point plus an additional (non-communicating) access point.
Directory codes shall be programmable from one (1) to four (4) digits.
Tone-open numbers to grant guest access shall be programmable. Additional tone open number commands shall include hold-open, close and hold-open one hour and then close.
A built-in time clock shall provide hold-open time zones and entry code time zones.
Two special inputs shall be available and programmable to allow activation of a system relay or to automatically call a preprogrammed phone number.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
The system shall be capable of sending DTMF tones after a call from the system is connected.
The telephone entry system shall be prewired for installation of a postal lock.
A. Cabinet
Cabinet is constructed from 16-gauge steel and is lockable, gasketed, NEMA 4 rated enclosure.
The telephone entry system shall be of hands-free design.
The speaker holes shall be offset to protect the speaker from vandalism.
The system shall utilize metal keypad and metal push buttons.
The control board shall be mounted to the rear of the system enclosure to protect it from vandalism.
The stainless steel faceplate shall be reinforced with a galvanized steel sub-plate. Faceplate shall be non-magnetic steel alloy #304 or #316 as per ASTM A167, A176, A408, and A484
2.3 EQUIPMENT
Model 1802 Telephone Entry System.
1000 phone numbers maximum, no directory.
Mounting
Surface Mount - 6 1/2 inches wide, 12 inches high, 5 inches deep. 2.4 MOUNTING POST
Standard Gooseneck Mounting Post
Pad mount style.
Constructed from 2 x 2 steel.
42-inches tall to bottom of mounting plate.
Sweeps out approximately 12-inches.
Mounting plate and mounting plate cover. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION
Contractor shall provide owner with an electronic copy of standard factory prepared operation instructions.
Section 28 13 00 Page 99
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 28 13 00 Page 100
Should be installed by qualified technicians who have been factory trained.
Wiring shall be uniform and in accordance with national electric codes and manufacturer’s instructions.
Conform to the manufacturers written requirements for installation. Systems are available for the following types of installation.
Post mounted using a heavy -duty gooseneck mounting post.
Equipment shall be firmly secured, plumb, and level.
All splices shall be in easily accessible junction boxes or on terminal boards.
All cable runs at the main control cabinets, in all auxiliary cabinets and at all phone blocks shall be tagged and identified.
Coordinate all work with other effected trades and contractors.
Fastenings:
Fasten on mounting post as recommended by the manufacturer 3.2 GROUNDING
Provide ground conductor consisting of No. 8 AWG solid copper wire. Provide copper-clad steel rod grounding electrodes 3/4 inch by 10 foot long. Drive electrodes into the earth so that the top of the electrode is at least 6 inches below the grade. Where driving is impracticable, bury electrodes a minimum of 12 inches deep and radially from the mounting post, with top of the electrode not less than 2 feet or more than 8 feet from the mounting post. Connect ground conductor to the mounting post and electrodes with bronze grounding clamps to create electrical continuity between the mounting post and ground rod. Total resistance of the mounting post to ground cannot exceed 25 ohms.
3.3 SYSTEM INITIALIZING AND PROGRAMMING
System shall include all instructions necessary for system configuration. .
System shall be turned on and adjustment made to meet requirements of specifications and on-site conditions.
System shall be programmed to function as specified.
Directory numbers, feature codes, and special programming shall be documented, printed and made available to all owners.
3.4 SYSTEM TEST PROCEDURES
System shall be completely tested to assure that the exchange and all components, stations, speakers, and accessories are hooked-up and in working order.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 28 13 00 Page 101
System shall be pre-tested by contractor and certified to function in accordance with plans and specifications.
System shall be tested in presence of owner's representative.
3.5 OWNER INSTRUCTIONS
Installation contractor shall conduct up to (4) hours of instruction in use and operation of the system to designated owner representatives, within (30) days of acceptance.
Installation contractor shall conduct up to (4) hours of technical training, in programming, troubleshooting, and service of the system, to designated owner representatives within (90) days of system acceptance.
3.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Submit electronic copies of manuals at least 2 weeks prior to field training. Submit data complying with the requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. Submit Data Package 2 for the items/units listed under SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
B. Operation and Maintenance Training
Conduct a training course for the members of the operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. Make the training period consist of a total of 8 hours of normal working time and start it after all work specified herein is functionally completed and the Performance Tests have been approved. Conduct field instruction that covers all of the items contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations. Submit the proposed On-site Training schedule concurrently with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals and at least 14 days prior to conducting the training course.
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 31 00 00 Page 102
SECTION 31 00 00 EARTHWORK
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)
AASHTO T 180 (2015) Standard Method of Test for
Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a 4.54-kg (10-lb) Rammer and a 457-mm (18-in.) Drop
AASHTO T 224 (2010) Standard Method of Test for
Correction for Coarse Particles in the Soil Compaction Test
AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)
AWWA C600 (2010) Installation of Ductile-Iron
Water Mains and Their Appurtenances
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C136/C136M (2014) Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM D1140 (2014) Amount of Material in Soils Finer
than the No. 200 (75-micrometer) Sieve
ASTM D1556/D1556M (2015; E 2016) Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D1557 (2012; E 2015) Standard Test Methods for
Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)
ASTM D2216 (2010) Laboratory Determination of Water
(Moisture) Content of Soil and Rock by Mass
ASTM D2321 (2014; E 2014) Standard Practice for
Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications
ASTM D2487 (2011) Soils for Engineering Purposes
(Unified Soil Classification System)
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 31 00 00 Page 103
ASTM D4318 (2010; E 2014) Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
ASTM D4318 (2010; E 2014) Liquid Limit, Plastic
Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
ASTM D6938 (2015) Standard Test Method for In-Place Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
ASTM D698 (2012; E 2014; E 2015) Laboratory
Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/cu. ft. (600 kN-m/cu. m.))
ASTM D7263 (2013) Standard Test Methods for
Laboratory Determination of Density (Unit Weight) of Soil Specimens
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)
EPA 600/4-79/020 (1983) Methods for Chemical Analysis of
Water and Wastes
EPA SW-846.3-3 (1999, Third Edition, Update III-A) Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste: Physical/Chemical Methods
1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Degree of Compaction
Degree of compaction required, except as noted in the second sentence, is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D1557 abbreviated as a percent of laboratory maximum density. Since ASTM D1557 applies only to soils that have 30 percent or less by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve, express the degree of compaction for material having more than 30 percent by weight of their particles retained on the 3/4 inch sieve as a percentage of the maximum density in accordance with AASHTO T 180 and corrected with AASHTO T 224. To maintain the same percentage of coarse material, use the "remove and replace" procedure as described in NOTE 8 of Paragraph 7.2 in AASHTO T 180.
B. Initial Backfill Material
Initial backfill consists of select material or satisfactory materials free from rocks 3 inches or larger in any dimension or free from rocks of such size as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller. When the pipe is coated or wrapped for corrosion protection, free the initial backfill material of stones larger than 3 inches in any dimension or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 31 00 00 Page 104
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
No subsurface soil boring logs were taken. A. Classification of Excavation
No consideration will be given to the nature of the materials, and all excavation will be designated as unclassified excavation.
1. Common Excavation
Include common excavation with the satisfactory removal and disposal of all materials not classified as rock excavation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-06 Test Reports
Borrow Site Testing; G
Select material test
Moisture Content Tests
Copies of all laboratory and field test reports within 24 hours of the completion of the test.
SD-07 Certificates
Laboratory Accreditation
Laboratory Qualifications
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Perform in a manner to prevent contamination or segregation of materials.
1.6 CRITERIA FOR BIDDING
Base bids on the following criteria:
a. Pipes or other artificial obstructions, except those indicated, will not be encountered.
b. Hard materials and rock will not be encountered.
c. Borrow material in the quantities required is not available at the
project site.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 31 00 00 Page 105
d. Blasting will not be permitted. Remove material in an approved manner.
1.7 REQUIREMENTS FOR OFFSITE SOILS
Test offsite soils brought in for use as backfill for Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons (TPH), Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl Benzene, and Xylene (BTEX) and full Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) including ignitability, corrosivity and reactivity. Backfill shall contain a maximum of 100 parts per million (ppm) of total petroleum hydrocarbons (TPH) and a maximum of 10 ppm of the sum of Benzene, Toluene, Ethyl Benzene, and Xylene (BTEX) and shall pass the TCPL test. Determine TPH concentrations by using EPA 600/4-79/020 Method 418.1. Determine BTEX concentrations by using EPA SW-846.3-3 Method 5030/8020. Perform TCLP in accordance with EPA SW-846.3-3 Method 1311. Perform HW characteristic tests for ignitability, corrosivity, and reactivity in accordance with accepted standard methods. Perform PCB testing in accordance with accepted standard methods for sampling and analysis of bulk solid samples. Provide borrow site testing for petroleum hydrocarbons and BTEX from a grab sample of material from the area most likely to be contaminated at the borrow site (as indicated by visual or olfactory evidence), with at least one test from each borrow site. For each borrow site, provide borrow site testing for HW characteristics from a composite sample of material, collected in accordance with standard soil sampling techniques. Do not bring material onsite until tests results have been received and approved by the Contracting Officer.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Utilities
Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities during construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Perform work adjacent to non-Government utilities as indicated in accordance with procedures outlined by utility company. Excavation made with power-driven equipment is not permitted within two feet of known Government-owned utility or subsurface construction. For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction, excavate by hand. Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured. Support uncovered lines or other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the Contracting Officer. Report damage to utility lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Contracting Officer.
B. Laboratory Qualifications for Soils Testing
The concrete testing laboratory must have the necessary equipment and experience to accomplish required testing. The laboratory must meet the requirements of ASTM D1557, ASTM D2216 and ASTM D7263.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 31 00 00 Page 106
A. Satisfactory Materials
Any materials classified by ASTM D2487 as GW, GP, GM, GP-GM, GW-GM, GC, GP-GC, GM-GC, SW, or SP free of debris, roots, wood, scrap material, vegetation, refuse, soft unsound particles, and frozen, deleterious, or objectionable materials. Unless specified otherwise, the maximum particle diameter shall be one-half the lift thickness at the intended location.
B. Select Material
Provide materials classified as SW or SP by ASTM D2487 where indicated with a maximum of 10 percent by weight shall be finer No. 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D1140.
C. Common Fill
Approved, unclassified soil material with the characteristics required to compact to the soil density specified for the intended location.
2.2 UTILITY BEDDING MATERIAL
Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as specified herein. Plastic piping shall have bedding to spring line of pipe. Provide ASTM D2321 materials as follows:
a. Class I: Angular, 0.25 to 1.5 inches, graded stone, including a
number of fill materials that have regional significance such as coral, slag, cinders, crushed stone, and crushed shells.
b. Class II: Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of
1.5 inches, including various graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines, generally granular and non-cohesive, either wet or dry. Soil Types GW, GP, SW, and SP are included in this class as specified in ASTM D2487.
A. Sand
Clean sand with a maximum of 10 percent by weight shall be finer No. 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D1140.
2.3 BORROW
Obtain borrow materials required in excess of those furnished from excavations from sources outside of Government property.
2.4 BURIED WARNING AND IDENTIFICATION TAPE
Provide metallic core or metallic-faced, acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene plastic warning tape manufactured specifically for warning and identification of buried utility lines. Provide tape on rolls, 3 inches minimum width, color coded as specified below for the intended utility with warning and identification imprinted in bold black letters continuously over the entire tape length. Warning and identification to
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 31 00 00 Page 107
read, "CAUTION, BURIED (intended service) LINE BELOW" or similar wording. Provide permanent color and printing, unaffected by moisture or soil.
Warning Tape Color Codes
Red Electric
Yellow Gas, Oil; Dangerous Materials
Orange Telephone and Other Communications
Blue Water Systems
Green Sewer Systems
White Steam Systems
Gray Compressed Air
A. Warning Tape for Metallic Piping
Provide acid and alkali-resistant polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above, with a minimum thickness of 0.003 inch and a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise, and 1250 psi crosswise, with a maximum 350 percent elongation.
B. Detectable Warning Tape for Non-Metallic Piping
Provide polyethylene plastic tape conforming to the width, color, and printing requirements specified above, with a minimum thickness of 0.004 inch, and a minimum strength of 1500 psi lengthwise and 1250 psi crosswise. Manufacture tape with integral wires, foil backing, or other means of enabling detection by a metal detector when tape is buried up to 3 feet deep. Encase metallic element of the tape in a protective jacket or provide with other means of corrosion protection.
2.5 DETECTION WIRE FOR NON-METALLIC PIPING
Insulate a single strand, solid copper detection wire with a minimum of 12 AWG.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Underground Utilities
Location of the existing utilities indicated is approximate. The Contractor shall physically verify the location and elevation of the existing utilities indicated prior to starting construction. [The
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 31 00 00 Page 108
Contractor shall contact the CRTC Civil Engineering Operations for assistance in locating existing utilities.
B. Machinery and Equipment
Movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes during construction shall be at the Contractor's risk. Repair, or remove and provide new pipe for existing or newly installed pipe that has been displaced or damaged.
3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clearing and Grubbing
Unless indicated otherwise, remove trees, stumps, logs, shrubs, brush and vegetation and other items that would interfere with construction operations within the within lines 5 feet outside of each building and structure line. Remove stumps entirely. Grub out matted roots and roots over 2 inches in diameter to at least 18 inches below existing surface.
B. Stripping
Strip suitable soil from the site where excavation or grading is required and stockpile separately from other excavated material. Material unsuitable for use as topsoil shall be stockpiled and used for backfilling, if suitable.
C. Unsuitable Material
Remove vegetation, debris, decayed vegetable matter, sod, mulch, and rubbish underneath paved areas or concrete slabs.
D. Frozen Material
Do not place material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost. Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, or other approved equipment well suited to the soil being compacted. Moisten material as necessary [to provide the moisture content that will readily facilitate obtaining the specified compaction with the equipment used.
3.3 GENERAL EXCAVATION
Excavate to contours, elevation, and dimensions required. Reuse excavated materials that meet the specified requirements for the material type required at the intended location. Keep excavations free from water. Excavate soil disturbed or weakened by Contractor's operations, soils softened or made unsuitable for subsequent construction due to exposure to weather. Excavations below indicated depths will not be permitted except to remove unsatisfactory material. Unsatisfactory material encountered below the grades shown shall be removed as directed. Refill with backfill and fill material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D698 maximum density. Unless specified otherwise, refill excavations cut below indicated depth with backfill and fill material and compact to 95 percent of ASTM D698 maximum density. Satisfactory material removed below the depths indicated, without
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
specific direction of the Contracting Officer, shall be replaced with satisfactory materials to the indicated excavation grade; except as specified for spread footings. Determination of elevations and measurements of approved over depth excavation of unsatisfactory material below grades indicated shall be done under the direction of the Contracting Officer. Perform the grading in accordance with the typical sections shown and the tolerances specified in paragraph FINISHING.
A. Trench Excavation Requirements
Excavate the trench 3 feet below final grade. Rock, where encountered, shall be excavated to a depth of at least 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe.
1. Bottom Preparation
Grade the bottoms of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe. Excavate bell holes to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point bearing. Remove stones of 3 inch or greater in any dimension, or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, whichever is smaller, to avoid point bearing. Tamp if necessary to provide a firm pipe bed.
B. Final Grade of Surfaces to Support Concrete
Excavation to final grade shall not be made until just before concrete is to be placed. [For pile foundations, the excavation shall be stopped at an elevation 6 to 12 inches above the bottom of the footing before driving piles. After pile driving has been completed, the remainder of the excavation shall be completed to the elevations shown.] Only excavation methods that will leave the foundation rock in a solid and un-shattered condition shall be used. Approximately level surfaces shall be roughened, and sloped surfaces shall be cut as indicated into rough steps or benches to provide a satisfactory bond. Shales shall be protected from slaking and all surfaces shall be protected from erosion resulting from ponding or flow of water.
3.4 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
Unsatisfactory material in surfaces to receive fill or in excavated areas shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials as directed by the Contracting Officer. The surface shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches before the fill is started. Sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal shall be plowed, stepped, benched, or broken up so that the fill material will bond with the existing material. When subgrades are less than the specified density, the ground surface shall be broken up to a minimum depth of 6 inches, pulverized, and compacted to the specified density. When the subgrade is part fill and part excavation or natural ground, the excavated or natural ground portion shall be scarified to a depth of 12 inches and compacted as specified for the adjacent fill. Material shall not be placed on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost. Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, steel-wheeled rollers, or other approved equipment well suited to the
Section 31 00 00 Page 109
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 31 00 00 Page 110
soil being compacted. Material shall be moistened or aerated as necessary to provide the moisture content that will readily facilitate obtaining the specified compaction with the equipment used. Minimum subgrade density shall be as specified herein.
A. Construction
Shape subgrade to line, grade, and cross section, and compact as required. Include plowing, disking, and any moistening or aerating required to obtain specified compaction for this operation. Remove soft or otherwise unsatisfactory material and replace with satisfactory excavated material or other approved material as directed. Excavate rock encountered in the cut section to a depth of 6 inches below finished grade for the subgrade. Bring up low areas resulting from removal of unsatisfactory material or excavation of rock to required grade with satisfactory materials, and shape the entire subgrade to line, grade, and cross section and compact as specified. Do not vary the elevation of the finish subgrade more than 0.05 foot from the established grade and cross section.
B. Compaction
Finish compaction vibratory compactors or other approved equipment. Except for paved areas compact each layer of the embankment to at least 95 percent of laboratory maximum density.
1. Subgrade for Pavements
Compact subgrade for pavements to at least 95 percentage laboratory maximum density for the depth below the surface of the pavement shown. When more than one soil classification is present in the subgrade, thoroughly blend, reshape, and compact the top 4 inches of subgrade.
3.5 SELECTION OF BORROW MATERIAL
Where satisfactory materials are not available in sufficient quantity from required excavations, approved borrow materials shall be obtained as specified herein.
3.6 BURIED TAPE AND DETECTION WIRE A. Buried Warning and Identification Tape
Provide buried utility lines with utility identification tape. Bury tape 12 inches below finished grade; under pavements and slabs, bury tape 6 inches below top of subgrade.
B. Buried Detection Wire
Bury detection wire directly above non-metallic piping at a distance not to exceed 12 inches above the top of pipe. Extend the wire continuously and unbroken, from manhole to manhole. Terminate the ends of the wire inside the manholes at each end of the pipe, with a minimum of 3 feet of wire, coiled, remaining accessible in each manhole. Furnish insulated wire over it's entire length. Install
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 31 00 00 Page 111
wires at manholes between the top of the corbel and the frame, and extend up through the chimney seal between the frame and the chimney seal. For force mains, terminate the wire in the valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe.
3.7 FILLING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION
Fill and backfill to contours, elevations required, and dimensions indicated. Place backfill adjacent to any and all types of structures, in successive horizontal layers of loose material not more than 8 inches in depth. Compact backfill materials in conformance with the applicable portions of paragraphs COMPACTION, to prevent wedging action or eccentric loading upon or against the structure. Backfill material must be within the range of -2 to +2 percent of optimum moisture content at the time of compaction.
Prepare ground surface on which backfill is to be placed and provide compaction requirements for backfill materials in conformance with the applicable portions of paragraphs COMPACTION. Finish compaction by vibratory compactors or other approved equipment.
A. Trench Backfill
Backfill as rapidly as construction and acceptance of work permits. Place and compact backfill under structures and paved areas in 6 inch lifts to top of trench and in6 inch lifts to one foot over pipe outside structures and paved areas.
1. Bedding and Initial Backfill
Place initial backfill material and compact it with approved tampers to a height of at least one foot above the utility pipe or conduit. Bring up the backfill evenly on both sides of the pipe for the full length of the pipe. Take care to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under the haunches of the pipe. Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section, provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600, Type 4, except as specified herein. Compact backfill to top of pipe to 95 percent of ASTM D698 maximum density. Provide plastic piping with bedding to spring line of pipe.
2. Final Backfill and Fill Placement
Backfilling shall not begin until construction below finish grade has been approved, underground utilities systems have been inspected, tested and approved, forms removed, and the excavation cleaned of trash and debris. Backfill shall be brought to required finish grade. The backfill material up to an elevation 1 foot above other utility lines shall be free from stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension. Heavy equipment for spreading and compacting backfill shall not be operated closer to foundation or retaining walls than a distance equal to the height of backfill above the top of footing; the area remaining shall be compacted in layers not more than 4 inches in compacted thickness with power-driven hand tampers suitable for the material being compacted. Backfill shall be placed carefully around pipes to
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 31 00 00 Page 112
avoid damage. Compact in conformance with the applicable portions of paragraphs COMPACTIONS.
B. Common Fill Placement
Provide for general site. Use satisfactory materials. Place in 6 inch lifts. Compact areas not accessible to rollers or compactors with mechanical hand tampers. Aerate material excessively moistened by rain to a satisfactory moisture content. Finish to a smooth surface by blading, rolling with a smooth roller, or both.
C. Select Material Placement
Provide for under paved areas and concrete slabs, except where select material is provided. Place in 6 inch lifts. Do not place over wet or frozen areas. Place backfill material adjacent to structures as the structural elements are completed and accepted. Backfill against concrete only when approved. Place and compact material to avoid loading upon or against the structure.
D. Compaction
Determine in-place density of existing subgrade; if required density exists, no compaction of existing subgrade will be required. Do not permit compaction by water flooding or jetting.
1. General Site
Compact underneath areas designated for vegetation and areas outside the 5 foot line of the paved area or structure to 90 percent of ASTM D698.
2. Concrete Slabs
Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D698. Compact common fill, fill and backfill material, and, structural fill, select foundation course, and select material to 95 percent of ASTM D698.
3. Adjacent Area
Compact areas within 5 feet of structures to 90 percent of ASTM D698.
4. Paved Areas
Compact top 12 inches of subgrades to 95 percent of ASTM D698. Compact fill and backfill materials, select fill, and granular base course to 95 percent of ASTM D698.
5. Utility Bedding
Backfill to top of pipe shall be compacted to 95 percent of ASTM D698 maximum density with select material.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 31 00 00 Page 113
3.8 SPECIAL EARTHWORK REQUIREMENTS
Special requirements for both excavation and backfill relating to the specific utilities are as follows:
A. Electrical Distribution System
Provide a minimum cover of 24 inches from the finished grade to direct burial cable and conduit or duct line, unless otherwise indicated.
3.9 FINISHING
Finish the surface of excavations and subgrades to a smooth and compact surface in accordance with the lines, grades, and cross sections or elevations shown. Provide the degree of finish for graded areas within 0.1 foot of the grades and elevations required except that the degree of finish for subgrades specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION. Finish the surface of areas to be turfed from settlement or washing to a smoothness suitable for the application of turfing materials. Repair graded or backfilled areas prior to acceptance of the work, and re- established grades to the required elevations and slopes.
A. Subgrade
During construction, keep excavations shaped and drained. Maintain ditches and drains along subgrade to drain effectively at all times. Do not disturb the finished subgrade by traffic or other operation. Protect and maintain the finished subgrade in a satisfactory condition until subbase, base, or pavement is placed. Do not permit the storage or stockpiling of materials on the finished subgrade. Do not lay subbase, base course, or pavement until the subgrade has been checked and approved, and in no case place subbase, base, or pavement on a muddy, spongy, or frozen subgrade.
B. Grading Around Structures
Construct areas within 5 feet outside of each building and structure line true-to-grade, shape to drain, and maintain free of trash and debris until final inspection has been completed and the work has been accepted.
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Laboratory Accreditation
Laboratory and testing facilities must be provided by and at the expense of the Contractor. The laboratories performing the tests must be accredited in accordance with ASTM D1557, including ASTM D2216 and ASTM D7263. The accreditation must be current and must include the required test methods, as specified.
B. Sampling
Take the number and size of samples required to perform the following tests.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 31 00 00 Page 114
C. Testing
Perform one of each of the following tests for each material used. Provide additional tests for each source change.
1. Select Material Testing
Test fill and backfill material in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M for conformance to ASTM D2487 gradation limits; ASTM D1140 for material finer than the No. 200 sieve; ASTM D4318 for liquid limit and for plastic limit; ASTM D698 or ASTM D1557 for moisture density relations, as applicable.
D. Density Tests
Test density in accordance with ASTM D1556/D1556M, or ASTM D6938. When ASTM D6938 density tests are used, verify density test results by performing an ASTM D1556/D1556M density test at a location already ASTM D6938 tested as specified herein. Perform an ASTM D1556/D1556M density test at the start of the job, and for every 10 ASTM D6938 density tests thereafter. Test each lift at randomly selected locations every 100 square feet of existing grade in fills for structures and concrete slabs, and every 100 square feet for other fill areas and every 100 square feet of subgrade in cut. Include density test results in daily report.
Bedding and backfill in trenches: One test per 25 linear feet in each lift.
E. Moisture Content Tests
In the stockpile, excavation or borrow areas, a minimum of two tests per day per type of material or source of materials being placed is required during stable weather conditions. During unstable weather, tests shall be made as dictated by local conditions and approved moisture content shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D2216. Include moisture content test results in daily report.
F. Optimum Moisture and Laboratory Maximum Density
Perform tests for each type material or source of material including borrow material to determine the optimum moisture and laboratory maximum density values. One representative test per 16 cubic yards of fill and backfill, or when any change in material occurs which may affect the optimum moisture content or laboratory maximum density.
G. Tolerance Tests for Subgrades
Perform continuous checks on the degree of finish specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION during construction of the subgrades.
3.11 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
Remove surplus material or other soil material not required or suitable for filling or backfilling, and brush, refuse, stumps, roots, and timber from Government property to an approved location.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 31 00 00 Page 115
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 01 19 Page 116
SECTION 32 01 19 JOINT SEALANTS FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)
AASHTO M 213 Specifications for "Preformed Expansion
Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C1016 (2014) Standard Test Method for
Determination of Water Absorption of Sealant Backing (Joint Filler) Material
ASTM D1751 (2004; E 2013; R 2013) Standard
Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)
ASTM D5893/D5893M (2010) Cold Applied, Single Component,
Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements
ASTM D789 (2015) Determination of Relative
Viscosity and Moisture Content of Polyamide (PA)
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Backup Materials
SD-04 Samples
Materials
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 01 19 Page 117
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Requirements
Test the joint sealant and backup or separating material for conformance with the referenced applicable material specification. Conformance with the requirements of the laboratory tests specified will not constitute final acceptance of the materials. Final acceptance will be based on the performance of the in-place materials. Submit samples of the materials (sealant, primer if required, and backup material), in sufficient quantity 10 days prior to the beginning of work. No material will be allowed to be used until it has been approved.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Inspect materials delivered to the job site for defects, unload, and store them with a minimum of handling to avoid damage. Provide storage facilities at the job site for maintaining materials at the temperatures and conditions recommended by the manufacturer.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
The ambient air temperature and the pavement temperature within the joint wall shall be a minimum of 50 degrees F and rising at the time of application of the materials. Do not apply sealant if moisture is observed in the joint.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 SEALANTS
Materials for sealing cracks in the various paved areas indicated on the drawings shall be as follows:
Area Sealing Material
Mow Strip ASTM D5893/D5893M
2.2 BACKUP MATERIALS
Provide backup material that is a compressible, non-shrinking, non- staining, non-absorbing material, nonreactive with the joint sealant. The material shall have a melting point at least 5 degrees F greater than the pouring temperature of the sealant being used when tested in accordance with ASTM D789. The material shall have a water absorption of not more than 5 percent of the sample weight when tested in accordance with ASTM C1016. Use backup material that is 25 plus or minus 5 percent larger in diameter than the nominal width of the crack.
2.3 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL
Provide preformed expansion joint filler material conforming to ASTM D1751 or AASHTO M 213. Provide expansion joint filler that is 3/4 inch
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 01 19 Page 118
thick, unless otherwise indicated, and provided in a single full depth piece.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXECUTING EQUIPMENT
Machines, tools, and equipment used in the performance of the work required by this section shall be maintained in satisfactory condition at all times.
A. Joint Cleaning Equipment
1. Concrete Saw
Provide a self-propelled power saw, with water-cooled diamond or abrasive saw blades, for cutting joints to the depths and widths specified or for re-facing joints.
2. Hand Tools
Hand tools may be used, when approved, for removing defective sealant from a crack and repairing or cleaning the crack faces.
B. Sealing Equipment
1. Cold-Applied, Single-Component Sealing Equipment
The equipment for installing ASTM D5893/D5893M single component joint sealants shall consist of small hand-held air-powered equipment (i.e., caulking guns) for small applications.
3.2 PREPARATION OF JOINTS
Immediately before the installation of the sealant, thoroughly clean the joints to remove all laitance, curing compound, filler, protrusions of hardened concrete from the sides and upper edges of the joint space to be sealed.
A. Sawing
1. Re-facing of Joints
Accomplish re-facing or facing of joints using a concrete saw as specified in paragraph EQUIPMENT to saw through sawed and filler- type joints to loosen and remove material until the joint is clean and open to the full specified width and depth. Stiffen the blade with a sufficient number of suitable dummy (used) blades or washers. Thoroughly clean, immediately following the sawing operation, the joint opening using a water jet to remove all saw cuttings and debris.
B. Construction Joints
Install construction joints at the end of each day's placing operations and at any other points within a placement when concrete placement is interrupted for 30 minutes or longer, , using joint
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 01 19 Page 119
filler of the type, thickness, and width indicated, and installed to form a complete, uniform separation between two pavements. Attach the filler to the original concrete placement with adhesive and mechanical fasteners and extend the full slab depth. After placement and curing of the adjacent slab, sawcut the sealant reservoir depth from the filler. Tightly fit adjacent sections of filler together, with the filler extending across the full width of the paving lane or other complete distance in order to prevent entrance of concrete into the expansion space. Finish edges of the concrete at the joint face with an edger with a radius of 1/8 inch.
C. Back-Up Material
When the joint opening is of a greater depth than indicated for the sealant depth, plug or seal off the lower portion of the joint opening using a back-up material to prevent the entrance of the sealant below the specified depth. Take care to ensure that the backup material is placed at the specified depth and is not stretched or twisted during installation.
D. Rate of Progress of Joint Preparation
Limit the stages of joint preparation, which include cleaning and placing of the back-up material to only that lineal footage that can be sealed during the same day.
3.3 PREPARATION OF SEALANT A. Single-Component, Cold-Applied Sealants
Inspect the ASTM D5893/D5893M sealant and containers prior to use. Reject any materials that contain water, hard caking of any separated constituents, nonreversible jell, or materials that are otherwise unsatisfactory. Settlement of constituents in a soft mass that can be readily and uniformly remixed in the field with simple tools will not be cause for rejection.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF SEALANT A. Time of Application
Seal joints immediately following final cleaning of the joint walls and following the placement of the separating or backup material. Open joints, that cannot be sealed under the conditions specified, or when rain interrupts sealing operations shall be re-cleaned and allowed to dry prior to installing the sealant.
B. Sealing Joints
Immediately preceding, but not more than 50 feet ahead of the joint sealing operations, perform a final cleaning with compressed air. Fill the joints from the bottom up to 1/8 to 1/4 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch below the pavement surface. Remove and discard excess or spilled sealant from the pavement by approved methods. Install the sealant in such a manner as to prevent the formation of voids and entrapped air. In no case shall gravity methods or pouring pots be used to install the sealant material. Traffic shall not be
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 01 19 Page 120
permitted over newly sealed pavement until authorized by the Contracting Officer. When a primer is recommended by the manufacturer, apply it evenly to the joint faces in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Check the joints frequently to ensure that the newly installed sealant is cured to a tack-free condition within the time specified.
3.5 INSPECTION A. Joint Cleaning
Inspect joints during the cleaning process to correct improper equipment and cleaning techniques that damage the concrete pavement in any manner. Cleaned joints will be approved prior to installation of the separating or back-up material and joint sealant.
B. Joint Sealant Application Equipment
Inspect the application equipment to ensure conformance to temperature requirements, proper proportioning and mixing (if two- component sealant) and proper installation. Evidences of bubbling, improper installation, failure to cure or set will be cause to suspend operations until causes of the deficiencies are determined and corrected.
C. Joint Sealant
Inspect the joint sealant for proper rate of cure and set, bonding to the joint walls, cohesive separation within the sealant, reversion to liquid, entrapped air and voids. Sealants exhibiting any of these deficiencies at any time prior to the final acceptance of the project shall be removed from the joint, wasted, and replaced as specified herein at no additional cost to the Government.
3.6 CLEAN-UP
Upon completion of the project, remove all unused materials from the site and leave the pavement in a clean condition.
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 11 16.16 Page 121
SECTION 32 11 16.16 BASE COURSE FOR RIGID PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM C117 (2013) Standard Test Method for
Materials Finer than 75-um (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing
ASTM C131/C131M (2014) Standard Test Method for
Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine
ASTM C136/C136M (2014) Standard Test Method for Sieve
Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates
ASTM C29/C29M (2009) Standard Test Method for Bulk Density ("Unit Weight") and Voids in Aggregate
ASTM D1556/D1556M (2015; E 2016) Standard Test Method for
Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by Sand-Cone Method
ASTM D1557 (2012; E 2015) Standard Test Methods for
Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- lbf/ft3) (2700 kN-m/m3)
ASTM D1883 (2014) CBR (California Bearing Ratio) of
Laboratory-Compacted Soils
ASTM D2940/D2940M (2015) Standard Specification for Graded Aggregate Material for Bases or Subbases for Highways or Airports
ASTM D4318 (2010; E 2014) Liquid Limit, Plastic
Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils
ASTM D5106 (2015) Steel Slag Aggregates for Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D6155 (2015) Nontraditional Coarse Aggregate
for Bituminous Paving Mixtures
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 11 16.16 Page 122
ASTM D6270 (2008; R 2012) Use of Scrap Tires in Civil Engineering Applications
ASTM D6938 (2015) Standard Test Method for In-Place
Density and Water Content of Soil and Soil-Aggregate by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth)
ASTM D75/D75M (2014) Standard Practice for Sampling
Aggregates 1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Materials
SD-05 Design Data
Gradation curve
SD-06 Test Reports
Bearing ratio
Liquid limit
Plasticity index
Dry weight of slag
Percentage of wear
Gradation tests
Density tests
SD-07 Certificates
Source
Location and name. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Inspect materials delivered to the site and store aggregates in a manner that will prevent segregation and contamination.
1.4 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 11 16.16 Page 123
Subject to approval of the Contracting Officer, special equipment as dictated by local conditions may be used.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
Do not construct course when atmospheric temperature is below 35 degrees F or when weather conditions could detrimentally affect quality of finished course. When temperature falls below 35 degrees F, protect areas of completed course against freezing.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS
ASTM D2940/D2940M, except as modified herein. Material shall consist of natural, processed or blends of waste concrete, masonry, cement, tile, or other waste material from on-site work as specified; rock, crushed concrete, concrete block, or crushed slag from off-site grading or demolition work; recycled porcelain, concrete, stone, or other recycled material complying with ASTM D6155; Class I Fill tire complying with ASTM D6270; steel slag complying with ASTM D5106; gravel; stone; slag; chert; caliche; limerock; coral; shell; quarry and mine waste; sand; or screenings; and soil or other similar binding or filler material. Material shall contain a minimum of 10 percent post-consumer recycled content, or a minimum of 20 percent post-industrial recycled content, and shall be free-draining. Obtain materials from sources approved by the Contracting Officer. Preliminary approval of pits shall not mean that material found in the deposit will be acceptable. Maximum dimensions of material particles shall not be greater than two-thirds the compacted thickness of the layer in which it is to be placed. Coarse aggregate shall have a percentage of wear of not more than 40 as determined by ASTM C131/C131M. Material shall have a bearing ratio of at least 30 as determined by laboratory test on a four day soaked specimen in accordance with ASTM D1883; compact the specimen in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method B, C, or D. Material passing the No. 40 sieve shall have a liquid limit of not more than 25 and a plasticity index of not more than 5 in accordance with ASTM D4318. Slag shall be an air-cooled blast furnace product having a dry weight not less than 65 pounds per cubic foot when tested in accordance with ASTM C29/C29M and consisting of angular fragments uniform in density and quality and reasonably free from thin and elongated pieces, dirt, or other objectionable material. [Grading shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch and a maximum of 1.5 inches.][Gradation of the final composite mixture shall conform to the following size and shall be the basis of the gradation curve:
Sieve Size (Square Openings)
Design Range (Percent Passing)
Job Mix Tolerance (Percent)
2 inch 100 -3
1 1/2 inch 90-100 +5
No. 4 30-60 +10
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 11 16.16 Page 124
Sieve Size (Square Openings)
Design Range (Percent Passing)
Job Mix Tolerance (Percent)
No. 200 0-15 +5
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
Prior to production and delivery of aggregates, take at least one initial sample in accordance with ASTM D75/D75M. Collect each sample by taking three incremental samples at random from source material to make a composite sample of not less than 50 pounds. Repeat sampling procedure when source of material is changed or when deficiencies or variations from specified grading of materials are found in testing.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GRADE CONTROL
Provide line and grade stakes for control. Place grade stakes in lanes parallel to centerline of areas to be paved and space for string lining or other control methods.
3.2 PLACING AND MIXING
Clean underlying surface of foreign substances and ensure proper compaction and smoothness before placement of course. Verify subsoils have a permeability between 0.5 and 3.0 inches per hour. Recondition, reshape, and re-compact areas damaged by freezing, rainfall, or other weather conditions. Mix and place materials to obtain a uniform course for the water content and gradation specified. Construct course in one or more layers. Make each layer between 3 and 8 inches in compacted thickness. Tire shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D6270.
3.3 COMPACTING AND FINISHING
Compact each layer to at least 100 percent of the maximum laboratory density determined in accordance with ASTM D1557 for areas subject to heavy vehicular traffic. Compact material inaccessible to rolling equipment by mechanical tamping. Tamp until surface is smooth and free from waves and irregularities. Aerate material excessively moistened by rain during construction. Aerate using blade graders, harrows, or other equipment until the moisture content is that needed to obtain specified density. Place and compact earth at edges of course for at least one foot of the shoulder.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Sampling During Construction
Take one random sample of each 100 tons of material placed, but not less than one random sample per day's run. Take samples in accordance with ASTM D75/D75M.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 11 16.16 Page 125
B. Testing
1. Material
Make gradation tests from each sample in accordance with ASTM C136/C136M. Determine material passing the No. 200 sieve in accordance with ASTM C117.
2. Smoothness Test
Test with a 10 foot straightedge applied parallel with and at right angles to centerline of the rolled area. Correct surface deviations in excess of 3/8 inch by loosening, adding or removing material, reshaping, watering, and compacting. When course is constructed in more than one layer, smoothness requirements apply only to the top layer.
3. Field Density Tests
ASTM D1556/D1556M or ASTM D6938. Take one field density test for each 10 square yards of each layer of course. When using ASTM D6938 to test field compaction densities, verify the results of the tests by performing one test per day using ASTM D1556/D1556M at locations previously tested by ASTM D6938 and one additional test using ASTM D1556/D1556M for every ten tests performed at locations previously tested by ASTM D6938.
4. Laboratory Density Tests
ASTM D1557, Method B, C, or D, for all material.
5. Thickness Test
Determine thickness of course from test holes not less than 3 inches in diameter. Obtain a thickness test for each 10 square yards of course. Where course deficiency is more than 1/2 inch, correct by scarifying, adding mixture of proper gradation, re- blading, and re-compacting. Where the measured thickness exceeds the indicated thickness by more than 1/2 inch, consider the measured thickness as the indicated or specified thickness plus 1/2 inch for determining the average. The average thickness shall be the average of the depth measurements and shall not underrun the thickness shown by more than 1/4 inch.
3.5 MAINTENANCE
After construction is completed, protect and maintain all areas of course against detrimental effects. Maintenance includes drainage, rolling, shaping, watering, or other action required to maintain course in proper condition. Maintain sufficient moisture by light sprinkling with water at the surface to prevent a dusty condition.
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 126
SECTION 32 13 13.06 RIGID PAVEMENT
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)
ACI 211.1 (1991; R 2009) Standard Practice for
Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete
ACI 301 (2010; ERTA 2015) Specifications for
Structural Concrete
ACI 305.1 (2014) Specification for Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306.1 (1990; R 2002) Standard Specification
for Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 325.12R (2002; R 2013) Guide for Design of Jointed Concrete Pavements for Streets and Local Roads
ACI 330R (2008) Guide for the Design and
Construction of Concrete Parking Lots
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A615/A615M (2015a; E 2015) Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM C1077 (2015) Standard Practice for
Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation
ASTM C1260 (2014) Standard Test Method for
Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C143/C143M (2012) Standard Test Method for Slump of
Hydraulic-Cement Concrete
ASTM C150/C150M (2015) Standard Specification for Portland Cement
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 127
ASTM C1567 (2013) Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali-Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C1602/C1602M (2012) Standard Specification for Mixing
Water Used in Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
ASTM C172/C172M (2014a) Standard Practice for Sampling
Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C231/C231M (2014) Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method
ASTM C260/C260M (2010a) Standard Specification for Air-
Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C309 (2011) Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
ASTM C31/C31M (2015a; E 2016) Standard Practice for
Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field
ASTM C33/C33M (2013) Standard Specification for
Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C494/C494M (2015a) Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C595/C595M (2015; E 2015) Standard Specification
for Blended Hydraulic Cements
ASTM C618 (2012a) Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
ASTM C78/C78M (2015b) Standard Test Method for
Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading)
ASTM C94/C94M (2015) Standard Specification for Ready-
Mixed Concrete
ASTM C989/C989M (2014) Standard Specification for Slag Cement for Use in Concrete and Mortars
U.S. DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE (DOD)
UFC 3-250-01FA (2004) Pavement Design for Roads,
Streets, Walks, and Open Storage Areas
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 128
1.2 DESIGN
This materials and construction specification is intended to be used on projects where the design was completed using UFC 3-250-01FA Pavement Design for Roads, Streets, Walks, and Open Storage Areas, ACI 330R, Guide for the Design and Construction of Concrete Parking Lots or ACI 325.12R, Guide for Design of Jointed Concrete Pavements for Streets and Local Roads, or equivalent.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
Portland cement concrete pavement shall use Section 32 11 16.16 BASE COURSE FOR RIGID PAVING, in addition to this section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-01 Preconstruction Submittals
Quality Control Personnel Certifications; G
Laboratory Accreditation; G
SD-03 Product Data
Curing Materials; G
Admixtures; G
Reinforcement; G
Biodegradable Form Release Agent
Submit a complete list of materials including type, brand and applicable reference specifications.
SD-05 Design Data
Concrete Mix Design; G
Thirty days minimum prior to concrete placement, submit a mix design, with applicable tests, for each strength and type of concrete for approval. Submit a complete list of materials including type; brand; source and amount of cement, fly ash, slag, and admixtures; and applicable reference specifications. Provide mix proportion data using at least three different water- cement ratios for each type of mixture, which will produce a range of strength encompassing those required for each class and type of concrete required. Submittal shall clearly indicate where each mix design will be used when more than one mix design is submitted. Obtain acknowledgement of approvals prior to
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 129
concrete placement. Submit a new mix design for each material source change.
SD-06 Test Reports
Aggregate Tests; G
Concrete Slump Tests; G
Air Content Tests; G
Flexural Strength Tests; G
Cementitious Materials; G
SD-07 Certificates
Ready-mixed Concrete Plant; G
Batch Tickets; G
Cementitious Materials; G
VOC Content for Form Release Agents, and Curing Compounds
Material Safety Data Sheets
Field Testing Technician and Testing Agency 1.5 MODIFICATION OF REFERENCES
Accomplish work in accordance with ACI publications except as modified herein. Consider the advisory or recommended provisions to be mandatory. Interpret reference to the "Building Official," the "Structural Engineer," and the "Architect/Engineer" to mean the Contracting Officer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
ASTM C94/C94M.
Follow ACI 301, ACI 304R and ASTM A934/A934M requirements and recommendations. Do not deliver concrete until forms, reinforcement, and embedded items are in place and ready for concrete placement. Do not store concrete curing compounds with materials that have a high capacity to adsorb volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.
A. Reinforcement
Store reinforcement of different sizes and shapes in separate piles or racks raised above the ground to avoid excessive rusting. Protect from contaminants such as grease, oil, and dirt. Ensure bar sizes can be accurately identified after bundles are broken and tags removed.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 130
A. Ready-mixed Concrete Plant Certification
Unless otherwise approved by the Contracting Officer, ready mixed concrete shall be produced and provided by a National Ready-Mix Concrete Association (NRMCA) certified plant. If a volumetric mobile mixer is used to produce the concrete, rather than ready-mixed concrete, the mixer(s) must conform to the standards of the Volumetric Mixer Manufacturers Bureau (VMMB). Verification shall be made by a current VMMB conformance plate affixed to the volumetric mixer equipment.
B. Required Information
Submit copies of laboratory test reports showing that the mix has been successfully tested to produce concrete with the properties specified and that mix will be suitable for the job conditions. The laboratory test reports shall include mill test and all other test for cementitious materials, aggregates, and admixtures. Provide maximum nominal aggregate size, combined aggregate gradation analysis, percentage retained and passing sieve, and a graph of percentage retained verses sieve size. Test reports shall be submitted along with the concrete mix design. Sampling and testing of materials, concrete mix design, sampling and testing in the field shall be performed by a commercial testing laboratory which conforms to ASTM C1077. The laboratory shall be approved in writing by the Government.
C. Batch Tickets
ASTM C94/C94M. Submit mandatory batch ticket information for each load of ready-mixed concrete.
D. Control Submittals
1. VOC Content for form release agents, and curing compounds
Submit certification for the form release agent, curing compounds, and concrete penetrating sealers that indicate the VOC content of each product.
2. Material Safety Data Sheets
Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all materials that are regulated for hazardous health effects. MSDS must be readily accessible during each work shift to employees when they are at the construction site.
E. Quality Control Personnel Certifications
Submit American Concrete Institute certification for the following:
a. Field Testing Technicians: ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade I.
1. Field Testing Technician and Testing Agency
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 131
Submit data on qualifications of proposed testing agency and technicians for approval by the Contracting Officer prior to performing testing on concrete.
a. Work on concrete under this contract must be performed by an
ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician Grade 1 qualified in accordance with ACI SP-2 or equivalent. Equivalent certification programs must include requirements for written and performance examinations as stipulated in ACI SP-2.
b. Testing agencies that perform testing services on reinforcing
steel must meet the requirements of ASTM E329.
c. Testing agencies that perform testing services on concrete materials must meet the requirements of ASTM C1077.
F. Laboratory Qualifications for Concrete Qualification Testing
The concrete testing laboratory must have the necessary equipment and experience to accomplish required testing. The laboratory must meet the requirements of ASTM C1077 and be Cement and Concrete Reference Laboratory (CCRL) inspected.
G. Laboratory Accreditation
Laboratory and testing facilities must be provided by and at the expense of the Contractor. The laboratories performing the tests must be accredited in accordance with ASTM C1077, including ASTM C78/C78M and ASTM C1260. The accreditation must be current and must include the required test methods, as specified. Furthermore, the testing must comply with the following requirements:
a. Aggregate Testing and Mix Proportioning: Aggregate testing and
mixture proportioning studies must be performed by an accredited laboratory and under the direction of a registered professional engineer in a U.S. state or territory competent in concrete materials who is competent in concrete materials and must sign all reports and designs.
b. Acceptance Testing: Furnish all materials, labor, and facilities
required for molding, curing, testing, and protecting test specimens at the site and in the laboratory. Furnish and maintain boxes or other facilities suitable for storing and curing the specimens at the site while in the mold within the temperature range stipulated by ASTM C31/C31M.
c. Contractor Quality Control: All sampling and testing must be
performed by an approved, onsite, independent, accredited laboratory.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS FOR FORMS
Provide wood, plywood, or steel.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 132
A. Wood Forms
Provide lumber that is square edged or tongue-and-groove boards, free of raised grain, knotholes, or other surface defects. Provide plywood that complies with NIST PS 1, B-B concrete form panels or better or AHA A135.4, hardboard for smooth form lining. Submit data verifying that composite wood products contain no urea formaldehyde resins. Virgin wood used must be FSC-certified.
1. Concrete Form Plywood (Standard Rough)
Provide plywood that conforms to NIST PS 1, B-B, concrete form, not less than 5/8-inch thick.
2. Overlaid Concrete Form Plywood (Standard Smooth)
Provide plywood that conforms to NIST PS 1, B-B, high density form overlay, not less than 5/8-inch thick.
B. Steel Forms
Provide steel form surfaces that do not contain irregularities, dents, or sags.
2.2 MATERIALS A. Cementitious Materials
Cementitious materials in concrete mix shall be 20 to 50 percent non-portland cement pozzolanic materials or slag by weight. Provide test data demonstrating compatibility and performance of concrete satisfactory to Contracting Officer.
1. Cement
ASTM C150/C150M, Type I or II or ASTM C595/C595M, Type IS, IP, or P.
2. Fly Ash and Pozzolan
ASTM C618, Type F, or N. Fly ash certificates shall include test results in accordance with ASTM C618.
3. Ultra Fine Fly Ash and Ultra Fine Pozzolan
Ultra Fine Fly Ash (UFFA) and Ultra Fine Pozzolan (UFP) shall conform to ASTM C618, Class F or N, and the following additional requirements:
a. The strength activity index at 28 days of age shall be at
least 95 percent of the control specimens.
b. The average particle size shall not exceed 6 microns.
4. Slag
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 133
ASTM C989/C989M, Slag Cement (formerly Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag) Grade 100 or 120. Certificates shall include test results in accordance with ASTM C989/C989M.
5. Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM) Content
The concrete mix shall always contain one of the SCMs listed in Table 1 within the range specified therein, whether or not the aggregates are found to be reactive in accordance with the paragraph entitled, "Alkali Silica Reactivity".
TABLE 1
SUPPLEMENTARY CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS CONTENT
Supplementary Cementitious Material Minimum Content (percent)
Maximum Content (percent)
Class N Pozzolan and Class F Fly Ash
SiO2 + Al2O3 + Fe2O3 > 70 percent 25 35
SiO2 + A12O3 + Fe2O3 > 80 percent 20 35
SiO2 + A12O3 + Fe2O3 > 90 percent 15 35
UFFA and UFP 7 16
GGBF Slag 40 50
B. Water
Water shall conform to ASTM C1602/C1602M. Hot water shall not be used unless approved by the Contracting Officer.
C. Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed stone, or a combination thereof. Aggregates, as delivered to the mixers, shall consist of clean, hard, uncoated particles. Coarse aggregate shall be washed. Washing shall be sufficient to remove dust and other coatings. Fine aggregate shall consist of natural sand, manufactured sand, or a combination of the two, and shall be composed of clean, hard, durable particles. Both coarse and fine aggregates shall meet the requirements of ASTM C33/C33M.
1. Alkali Reactivity Test
Aggregates to be used in all concrete in projects shall be evaluated and tested by the Contractor for alkali-aggregate reactivity in accordance with ASTM C1260. The types of aggregates shall be evaluated in a combination which matches the contractors' proposed mix design (including Class F fly ash or GGBF slag), utilizing ASTM C1567. Test results of the combination shall have a measured expansion of less than 0.08
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 134
percent at 28 days. Should the test data indicate an expansion of greater than 0.08%, the aggregate(s) shall be rejected and the contractor shall submit new aggregate sources for retesting or may submit additional test results incorporating Lithium Nitrate for consideration.
ASTM C1567 shall be performed as follows to include one of the following options:
a. Utilize the contractor's proposed low alkali Portland cement
and Class F fly ash in combination for the test proportioning. The laboratory shall use the contractor's proposed percentage of cement and fly ash.
b. Utilize the contractor's proposed low alkali Portland cement
and ground granulated blast furnace (GGBF) slag in combination for the test proportioning. The laboratory shall use the contractor's proposed percentage of cement and GGBF.
c. Utilize the contractor's proposed low alkali Portland cement
and Class F fly ash and ground granulated blast furnace (GGBF) slag in combination for the test proportioning. The laboratory shall use the contractor's proposed percentage of cement, fly ash and GGBF.
2. Fine Aggregates
ASTM C33/C33M.
3. Coarse Aggregates
ASTM C33/C33M.
D. Admixtures
ASTM C494/C494M: Type A, water reducing; Type B, retarding; Type C, accelerating; Type D, water-reducing and retarding; and Type E, water-reducing and accelerating admixture. Do not use calcium chloride admixtures. Where not shown or specified, the use of admixtures is subject to written approval of the Contracting Officer.
ASTM C260/C260M: Air-entraining.
E. Curing Materials
1. Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound
ASTM C309, white pigmented, Type 2, Class B, free of paraffin or petroleum.
F. Joint Fillers and Sealants
Provide as specified in Section 32 01 19 JOINT SEALANTS. G. Biodegradable Form Release Agent
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 135
Provide form release agent that is colorless, biodegradable, and rapeseed oil-based, soy oil-based, or water-based, with a low (maximum of 55 grams/liter (g/l)) VOC content. A minimum of 85 percent of the total product must be biobased material. Provide product that does not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and does not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. Provide form release agent that does not contain diesel fuel, petroleum-based lubricating oils, waxes, or kerosene. Submit documentation indicating type of biobased material in product and biobased content. Indicate relative dollar value of biobased content products to total dollar value of products included in project.
2.3 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars
ACI 301 unless otherwise specified. Use deformed steel. ASTM A615/A615M with the bars marked A, Grade 60. Cold drawn wire used for spiral reinforcement must conform to ASTM A1064/A1064M. Submit mill certificates for reinforcing bars.
B. Welded Wire Reinforcement
ASTM A1064/A1064M. C. Reinforcing Bar Supports
Supports include bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices necessary for proper spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place.
Legs of supports in contact with formwork must be hot-dip galvanized, or plastic coated after fabrication, or stainless-steel bar supports.
2.4 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
Concrete mix design shall be designed in accordance with ACI 211.1 except as modified herein, and the mix design shall be as specified herein under paragraph entitled "Submittals." The concrete shall have a minimum flexural strength of 650 pounds per square inch at 28 days. The concrete may be air entrained. If air entrainment is used the air content shall be 5.0. Maximum size aggregate for slip forming shall be 1.5 inches. The slump shall be 1 to 3 inches.
If the cementitious material is not sufficient to produce concrete of the flexural strength required it shall be increased as necessary, without additional compensation under the contract. The cementitious factor shall be calculated using cement, Class F fly ash, and or GGBF slag. The mix shall use a SCM material by weight per Table 1 in "Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM) Content"
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FORMS
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 136
A. Construction
Construct forms to be removable without damaging the concrete. B. Coating
Before placing the concrete, coat the contact surfaces of forms with a non-staining mineral oil, non-staining form coating compound, or two coats of nitro-cellulose lacquer.
C. Grade and Alignment
Check and correct grade elevations and alignment of the forms immediately before placing the concrete.
3.2 REINFORCEMENT A. Setting Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be positioned on suitable chairs or precast concrete blocks, spaced at intervals required by size of reinforcement, to keep reinforcement the minimum height specified above the underside of the pavement, prior to concrete placement. At expansion, contraction and construction joints, place the reinforcement as indicated. Reinforcement, when placed in concrete, shall be free of mud, oil, scale or other foreign materials. Place reinforcement accurately and wire securely. The laps at splices shall be 12 inches minimum and the distances from ends and sides of slabs and joints shall be as indicated.
Provide reinforcement that is supported and secured together to prevent displacement by construction loads or by placing of wet concrete, and as follows:
Provide supports for reinforcing bars that are sufficient in number and have sufficient strength to carry the reinforcement they support, and in accordance with ACI 318, ACI SP-66 and CRSI 10MSP. Do not use supports to support runways for concrete conveying equipment and similar construction loads.
Equip supports on ground and similar surfaces with sand-plates.
Support welded wire reinforcement as required for reinforcing bars.
Secure reinforcements to supports by means of tie wire. Wire must be black, soft iron wire, not less than 16 gage.
Reinforcement must be accurately placed, securely tied at intersections, and held in position during placing of concrete by spacers, chairs, or other approved supports. Point wire-tie ends away from the form. Unless otherwise indicated, numbers, type, and spacing of supports must conform to ACI SP-66.
Bending of reinforcing bars partially embedded in concrete is permitted only as specified in ACI SP-66 and ACI 318.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 137
B. Spacing of Reinforcing Bars
Spacing must be as indicated. If not indicated, spacing must be in accordance with the ACI 318 and ACI SP-66.
Reinforcing bars may be relocated to avoid interference with other reinforcement, or with conduit, pipe, or other embedded items. If any reinforcing bar is moved a distance exceeding one bar diameter or specified placing tolerance, resulting rearrangement of reinforcement is subject to preapproval by the Contracting Officer.
C. Concrete Protection for Reinforcement
Concrete protection must be in accordance with the ACI 318 and ACI SP-66.
3.3 MEASURING, MIXING, CONVEYING, AND PLACING CONCRETE A. Measuring
ASTM C94/C94M. B. Mixing
ASTM C94/C94M, except as modified herein. Begin mixing within 30 minutes after cement has been added to aggregates. When the air temperature is greater than 85 degrees F, place concrete within 60 minutes. With the approval of the Contracting Officer, a hydration stabilizer admixture meeting the requirements of ASTM C494/C494M Type D, may be used to extend the placement time to 90 minutes. Additional water may be added to bring slump within required limits as specified in Section 11.7 of ASTM C94/C94M, provided that the specified water-cement ratio is not exceeded.
C. Conveying
ASTM C94/C94M. D. Placing
Follow guidance of ACI 301, except as modified herein. Do not exceed a free vertical drop of 5 feet from the point of discharge. Deposit concrete either directly from the transporting equipment or by conveyor on to the pre-wetted subgrade or subbase, unless otherwise specified. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or subbase. Deposit the concrete between the forms to an approximately uniform height. Place concrete continuously at a uniform rate, with minimum amount of segregation, without damage to the grade and without unscheduled stops except for equipment failure or other emergencies. If this occurs within 10 feet of a previously placed expansion joint, remove concrete back to joint, repair any damage to grade, install a construction joint and continue placing concrete only after cause of the stop has been corrected.
E. Vibration
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 138
Immediately after spreading concrete, consolidate concrete with internal type vibrating equipment along the boundaries of all slabs regardless of slab thickness, and interior of all concrete slabs 6 inches or more in thickness. Limit duration of vibration to that necessary to produce consolidation of concrete. Excessive vibration will not be permitted. Vibrators shall not be operated in concrete at one location for more than 15 seconds. At the option of the Contractor, vibrating equipment of a type approved by the Contracting Officer may be used to consolidate concrete in unreinforced pavement slabs less than 6 inches thick.
1. Vibrating Equipment
Shall be hand-operated immersion vibrator. The hand-operated immersion vibrator shall be inserted into the concrete not closer to the underlying material than 2 inches. Excessive vibration shall not be permitted. Vibrators shall not be used to transport or spread the concrete.
F. Cold Weather
Except with authorization, do not place concrete when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or when concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing temperatures within 24 hours. When authorized, when concrete is likely to be subjected to freezing within 24 hours after placing, heat concrete materials so that temperature of concrete when deposited is between 65 and 80 degrees F. Methods of heating materials are subject to approval of the Contracting Officer. Do not heat mixing water above 165 degrees F. Remove lumps of frozen material and ice from aggregates before placing aggregates in mixer. Follow practices found in ACI 306.1.
G. Hot Weather
Maintain required concrete temperature in accordance with Figure NRMCA NOMOGRAPH FOR ESTIMATING EVAPORATION RATE ON THE BASIS OF MENZEL FORMULA in ACI 305.1 to prevent evaporation rate from exceeding 0.2 pound of water per square foot of exposed concrete per hour. Cool ingredients before mixing or use other suitable means to control concrete temperature and prevent rapid drying of newly placed concrete. After placement, use fog spray, apply monomolecular film, or use other suitable means to reduce the evaporation rate. Start curing when surface of fresh concrete is sufficiently hard to permit curing without damage. Cool underlying material by sprinkling lightly with water before placing concrete. Follow practices found in ACI 305.1.
3.4 PAVING
Pavement shall be constructed with paving and finishing equipment utilizing fixed forms.
A. Consolidation
The hand-operated immersion vibrator shall be inserted into the concrete not closer to the underlying material than 2 inches.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 139
Excessive vibration shall not be permitted. Vibrators shall not be used to transport or spread the concrete.
B. Required Results
No water, other than true fog sprays (mist), shall be applied to the concrete surface during placement and finishing.
C. Fixed Form Paving
Forms shall be steel, except that wood forms may be used for curves having a radius of 150 feet or less, and for fillets. Forms may be built up with metal or wood, added only to the base, to provide an increase in depth of not more than 25 percent. The base width of the form shall be not less than eight-tenths of the vertical height of the form, except that forms 8 inches or less in vertical height shall have a base width not less than the vertical height of the form. Wood forms for curves and fillets shall be adequate in strength and rigidly braced. Forms shall be set on firm material cut true to grade so that each form section when placed will be firmly in contact with the underlying layer for its entire base. Forms shall not be set on blocks or on built-up spots of underlying material. Forms shall remain in place at least 12 hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms shall be removed without injuring the concrete.
D. Placing Reinforcing Steel
Reinforcement shall be positioned on suitable chairs or precast concrete blocks securely fastened to the subgrade prior to concrete placement.
3.5 FINISHING CONCRETE
Start finishing operations immediately after placement of concrete. Provide hand finishing equipment for use at all times. Transverse and longitudinal surface tolerances shall be 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
Screed the concrete with a template advanced with a combined longitudinal and crosswise motion. Maintain a slight surplus of concrete ahead of the template. After screeding, float the concrete longitudinally. Use a straightedge to check slope and flatness; correct and refloat as necessary. Obtain final finish conforming to the requirements in paragraph TEXTURING. Round edges and joints with an edger having a radius of 1/8 inch.
A. Texturing
Before the surface sheen has disappeared and before the concrete hardens, the surface of the pavement shall be given a texture as described herein. Following initial texturing on the first day of placement, the Placing Foreman, Contracting Officer representative, and a representative of the Using Agency shall inspect the texturing for compliance with design requirements. After curing is complete, all textured surfaces shall be thoroughly power broomed to remove all debris. Any type of transverse texturing shall produce grooves
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 140
in straight lines across each lane within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/2 inch of a true line.
1. Brooming
Finish the surface of the slab by brooming the surface with a new wire broom at least 18 inches wide. Gently pull the broom over the surface of the pavement from edge to edge just before the concrete becomes non-plastic. Slightly overlap adjacent strokes of the broom. Broom perpendicular to centerline of pavement so that corrugations produced will be uniform in character and width, and not more than 1/16 inch in depth. Broomed surface shall be free from porous spots, irregularities, depressions, and small pockets or rough spots such as may be caused by accidentally disturbing particles of coarse aggregate embedded near the surface.
B. Edging
At the time the concrete has attained a degree of hardness suitable for edging, carefully finish slab edges, including edges at formed joints, with an edge having a maximum radius of one-eighth inch. When brooming is specified for the final surface finish, edge transverse joints before starting brooming, then operate broom to obliterate as much as possible the mark left by the edging tool without disturbing the rounded corner left by the edger. Clean by removing loose fragments and soupy mortar from corners or edges of slabs which have crumbled and areas which lack sufficient mortar for proper finishing. Refill voids solidly with a mixture of suitable proportions and consistency and refinish. Remove unnecessary tool marks and edges. Remaining edges shall be smooth and true to line.
C. Repair of Surface Defects
Follow guidance of ACI 301. 3.6 CURING AND PROTECTION
Protect concrete adequately from injurious action by sun, rain, flowing water, [frost,] mechanical injury, tire marks and oil stains, and do not allow it to dry out from the time it is placed until the expiration of the minimum curing periods specified herein. Use liquid membrane- forming compound, except as specified otherwise herein. Do not use membrane-forming compound on surfaces where its appearance would be objectionable, on surfaces to be painted, where coverings are to be bonded to concrete, or on concrete to which other concrete is to be bonded. Maintain temperature of air next to concrete above 40 degrees F for the full curing periods.
A. Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound Curing
Apply compound immediately after surface loses its water sheen and has a dull appearance and before joints are sawed. Agitate curing compound thoroughly by mechanical means during use and apply uniformly in a two-coat continuous operation by suitable power- spraying equipment. Total coverage for the two coats shall be at least one gallon of undiluted compound per 200 square feet.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 141
Compound shall form a uniform, continuous, coherent film that will not check, crack, or peel and shall be free from pinholes or other imperfections. Apply an additional coat of compound immediately to areas where film is defective. Respray concrete surfaces that are subject to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after curing compound has been applied in the same manner.
1. Protection of Treated Surfaces
Keep concrete surfaces to which liquid membrane-forming compounds have been applied free from vehicular traffic and other sources of abrasion for not less than 72 hours. Foot traffic is allowed after 24 hours for inspection purposes. Maintain continuity of coating for entire curing period and repair damage to coating immediately.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Sampling
The Contractor's approved laboratory shall collect samples of fresh concrete in accordance with ASTM C172/C172M during each working day as required to perform tests specified herein. Make test specimens in accordance with ASTM C31/C31M.
B. Consistency Tests
The Contractor's approved laboratory shall perform concrete slump tests in accordance with ASTM C143/C143M. Take samples for slump determination from concrete during placement. Perform tests at the beginning of a concrete placement operation and and for each batch (minimum) or every 20 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete to ensure that specification requirements are met. In addition, perform tests each time test beams and cylinders are made.
C. Flexural Strength Tests
The Contractor's approved laboratory shall test for flexural strength in accordance with ASTM C78/C78M. Make four test specimens for each set of tests. Test two specimens at 14 days, and the other two at 28 days. Concrete strength will be considered satisfactory when the minimum of the 28-day test results equals or exceeds the specified 28-day flexural strength, and no individual strength test is less than 550 pounds per square inch. If the ratio of the 28-day strength test to the specified 28-day strength is less than 65 percent, make necessary adjustments for conformance. Frequency of flexural tests on concrete beams shall be not less than four test beams for each 50 cubic yards of concrete, or fraction thereof, placed. Concrete which is determined to be defective, based on the strength acceptance criteria therein, shall be removed and replaced with acceptable concrete.
D. Air Content Tests
Test air-entrained concrete for air content at the same frequency as specified for slump tests. Determine percentage of air in
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 13 13.06 Page 142
accordance with ASTM C231/C231M on samples taken during placement of concrete in forms.
E. Reinforcement
Inspect reinforcement prior to installation to assure it is free of loose flaky rust, loose scale, oil, mud, or other objectionable material.
3.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT
Provide as specified in the Waste Management Plan and as follows. A. Mixing Equipment
Before concrete pours, designate on-site area acceptable to the Contracting Officer for cleaning out concrete mixing trucks. Minimize water used to wash equipment.
B. Hardened, Cured Waste Concrete
Hardened, cured waste concrete shall be removed from Government property and taken to an acceptable recycling facility.
C. Reinforcing Steel
Excess reinforcing steel shall be removed from Government property and taken to an acceptable recycling facility.
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 16 13.01 Page 143
SECTION 32 16 13.01 CONCRETE MOW STRIP
PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Provide plant, equipment, machines, and tools used in the work subject to approval and maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times. The equipment shall have the capability of producing the required product, meeting grade controls, thickness control and smoothness requirements as specified. Use of the equipment shall be discontinued if it produces unsatisfactory results. The Contracting Officer shall have access at all times to the plant and equipment to ensure proper operation and compliance with specifications.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE AND REINFORCEMENT
Provide concrete and reinforcement conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 32 13 13.06 RIGID PAVEMENTS. Submit copies of certified delivery tickets for all concrete used in the construction.
2.2 JOINT FILLERS AND SEALANTS
Provide joint fillers and sealants conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 32 01 19 JOINT SEALANT FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
The subgrade shall be constructed to the required grade and cross section prior to concrete placement.
Subgrade shall be placed and compacted in conformance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.2 MOW STRIP REINFORCEMENT PLACEMENT
Provide concrete reinforcement placement conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 32 13 13.06 RIGID PAVEMENTS.
3.3 MOW STRIP CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING A. Concrete Placement
Provide concrete placement conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 32 13 13.06 RIGID PAVEMENTS.
B. Concrete Finishing
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 16 13.01 Page 144
Provide concrete finishing conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 32 13 13.06 RIGID PAVEMENTS.
3.4 MOW STRIP JOINTS
Mow strip joints shall be constructed at right angles to the line of mow strip.
Contraction joints shall be constructed and spaced so that monolithic sections between mow strips returns will not be less than 5 feet nor greater than 25 feet in length.
Joints shall be sealed as specified in Section 32 01 19 JOINT SEALANT FOR SEALING JOINTS IN RIGID PAVEMENTS.
3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Curing
Provide concrete curing conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 32 13 13.06 RIGID PAVEMENTS.
B. Backfilling
Provide backfilling conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
C. Protection
Provide concrete protection conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 32 13 13.06 RIGID PAVEMENTS.
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Provide concrete field quality control conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 32 13 13.06 RIGID PAVEMENTS.
Provide earthwork field quality control conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 13.53 Page 145
SECTION 32 31 13.53 HIGH-SECURITY CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM A116 (2011) Standard Specification for
Metallic-Coated, Steel Woven Wire Fence Fabric
ASTM A121 (2013) Standard Specification for
Metallic-Coated Carbon Steel Barbed Wire
ASTM A153/A153M (2009) Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
ASTM A392 (2011a) Standard Specification for Zinc-
Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric
ASTM A780/A780M (2009; R 2015) Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings
ASTM A824 (2001; R 2012) Standard Specification
for Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension Wire for Use With Chain Link Fence
ASTM F1043 (2014) Strength and Protective Coatings
on Metal Industrial Chain-Link Fence Framework
ASTM F1083 (2013) Standard Specification for Pipe,
Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures
ASTM F1184 (2005; R 2010) Industrial and Commercial
Horizontal Slide Gates
ASTM F567 (2014a) Standard Practice for Installation of Chain Link Fence
ASTM F626 (2014) Standard Specification for Fence
Fittings
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 13.53 Page 146
ASTM F900 (2011) Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates
1.2 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Fence Installation
Installation Drawings
Location of gate, corner, end, and pull posts
Gate Assembly
Gate Hardware and Accessories
SD-03 Product Data
Fence Installation
Gate Assembly
Gate Hardware and Accessories
Fence and Gate Cable Reinforcement
Grout and Anchoring Cement
Fence Hardware and Accessories
Fence Fabric
Zinc Coating
Fence Posts
Braces and Rails
Tension Wire
Wire Ties
Barbed Wire
Barbed Wire Supporting Arms
SD-06 Test Reports
zinc coating
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 13.53 Page 147
SD-07 Certificates
Chain Link Fence
Reports
Zinc Coating
Fabric
Barbed Wire
Stretcher Bars
Gate Hardware and Accessories
Fence Hardware and Accessories
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Fence Installation
Gate Assembly
Hardware Assembly
Accessories
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operating and Maintenance Instructions
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Required Report Data
Submit reports, signed by an official authorized to certify on behalf of the manufacturer, of chain-link fencing listing and accessories regarding weight in ounces for zinc coating.
B. Assembly and Installation Drawings
Submit Manufacturer's instructions and complete Fence Installation Drawings for review and approval by the Contracting Officer prior to shipment. Drawing details shall include, but are not limited to: Fence Installation, Location of gate, corner, end, and pull posts, Gate Assembly, and Gate Hardware and Accessories.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver materials to site in an undamaged condition. Store materials off the ground to provide protection against oxidation caused by ground contact.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 13.53 Page 148
2.1 ZINC COATING
Provide hot-dip galvanized (after fabrication) ferrous-metal components and accessories, except as otherwise specified.
Provide zinc coating of weight not less than 2.0 ounces per square foot, as determined from the average result of two specimens, when tested in accordance with ASTM A90/A90M.
Provide galvanizing repair material that is cold-applied zinc-rich coating conforming to ASTM A780/A780M:
a. Pipe: FS RR-F-191/3 Class 1 Grade A in accordance with ASTM F1083.
b. Hardware and Accessories: ASTM A153/A153M, Table 1.
c. Surface: ASTM F1043.
d. External: Type B-B surface zinc with organic coating, 275 gram per
square meter 0.97 ounce per square foot minimum thickness of acrylated polymer.
e. Internal: Surface zinc coating of 275 gram per square meter 0.97
ounce per square foot minimum. 2.2 FENCE FABRIC A. General
Provide ASTM A392, Class 1, zinc-coated steel wire with minimum coating weight of 2.0 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface. Fabricate fence fabric of 9 gauge wire woven in 2 inch mesh conforming to ASTM A116. Set fabric height as shown. Fabric shall be [twisted and barbed on the top selvage and knuckled on the bottom selvage and twisted and barbed on the top and bottom selvages. Secure fabric to posts using stretcher bars and ties spaced 15 inches on center, or by integrally weaving to integral fastening loops of end, corner, pull, and gate posts for full length of each post. Install fabric on opposite side of posts from area being secured.
B. Fence Hardware and Accessories
1. General
Provide accessories conforming to ASTM F626 and Accessories shall be zinc coated conforming to ASTM A153/A153M, unless modified herein.
2. Stretcher Bars
Provide bars that are galvanized minimum zinc coating 1.20 oz/sq ft and have one-piece lengths equal to the full height of the fabric with a minimum cross section of 3/16 by 3/4 inch, in accordance with ASTM A116, ASTM A702 and ASTM F626.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 13.53 Page 149
3. Hog Rings
Provide hog rings that are galvanized minimum zinc coating 1.20 oz/sq ft 9 gauge steel wire, in accordance with ASTM F626.
4. Stretcher Bar Bands
Provide stretcher bar bands that are galvanized minimum zinc coating 1.20 oz/sq ft, in accordance with ASTM A116, ASTM A702 and ASTM F626.
5. Miscellaneous Hardware
Provide miscellaneous hot-dip galvanized hardware as required.
2.3 POSTS A. Metal Posts for Chain Link Fence
Provide posts conforming to ASTM F1083, zinc-coated. Group IA, with external coating Type A steel pipe. Provide sizes as shown on the drawings. Line posts and terminal (corner, gate, and pull) posts selected shall be of the same designation throughout the fence. Provide gate post for the gate type specified subject to the limitation specified in ASTM F900 and/or ASTM F1184. Post spacing shall conform to the recommended guidelines as set forth in the CLFMI "Wind Load Guide for the Selection of Line Post Spacing and Size" unless specified to exceed those guidelines.
B. Accessories
a. Provide accessories conforming to ASTM F626. Ferrous accessories shall be zinc coated.
b. Furnish truss rods for each terminal post. Provide truss rods with turnbuckles or other equivalent provisions for adjustment.
c. Provide Barbed wire supporting arms of the 45 degree outward angle 3-strand and V 6 strand arm type and of the design required for the post furnished, as shown. Secure arms by top tension wire and top rail, as shown.
e. Provide 9 gauge steel tie wire for attaching fabric to rails, braces, and posts and match the coating of the fence fabric. Hog rings for attaching fabric to tension wire on high security fences shall be 9 gage. Miscellaneous hardware coatings shall conform to ASTM A153/A153M unless modified.
2.4 BRACES AND RAILS
Provide zinc-coated1.660 inches O.D. pipe for braces and rails, Grade A weighing 2.27 pounds per linear foot. Zinc-coating shall meet the strength and coating requirements of ASTM F1043.
2.5 WIRE
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 13.53 Page 150
A. Wire Ties
Provide tie wire that are galvanized minimum zinc coating 1.20 oz/sq ft 9 gauge steel wire, in accordance with ASTM F626.
B. Barbed Wire
Provide barbed wire conforming to ASTM A121 zinc-coated, Type Z, Class 3 with 12.5 gauge wire with 14 gauge, round, 4-point barbs spaced no more than 5 inches apart.
C. Tension Wire
Provide Type I or Type II tension wire, Class 4 coating, in accordance with ASTM A824. Provide 7 gauge coil spring wire for top wire.
2.6 CONCRETE
Provide concrete conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 32 13 13.06 RIGID PAVEMENTS.
2.7 GATES A. Gate Assembly
Provide gate assembly conforming to ASTM F900 and/or ASTM F1184 of the type and swing shown. Provide gate frames conforming to strength and coating requirements of ASTM F1083 for Group IA, steel pipe, with external coating Type A, nominal pipe size (NPS) 1-1/2. Provide gate frames conforming to strength and coating requirements of ASTM F1043, for Group IC, steel pipe with external coating Type A or Type B, nominal pipe size (NPS) 1-1/2. Gate fabric shall be as specified for chain link fabric.
B. Gate Leaves
For gate leaves, more than 8 feet wide, provide either intermediate members and diagonal truss rods or tubular members as necessary to provide rigid construction, free from sag or twist. Gate leaves less than 8 feet wide shall have truss rods or intermediate braces. Provide intermediate braces on all gate frames with an electro- mechanical lock. Attach fabric to the gate frame by method standard with the manufacturer except that welding will not be permitted.
C. Gate Hardware and Accessories
Submit manufacturer's catalog data. Furnish and install latches, hinges, stops, keepers, rollers, and other hardware items as required for the operation of the gate. Arrange latches for padlocking so that the padlock will be accessible from both sides of the gate. Provide stops for holding the gates in the open position. For high security applications, each end member of gate frames shall be extended sufficiently above the top member to carry three strands of barbed wire in horizontal alignment with barbed wire strands on the fence.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 13.53 Page 151
2.8 GATE OPERATOR
Provide electric gate operator as specified in Section 32 31 14 ELECTRIC GATE OPERATOR.
2.9 ACCESS CONTROL/TELEPHONE ENTRY SYSTEM
Provide access control/telephone entry system as specified in Section 28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROL/TELEPHONE ENTRY SYSTEM.
2.10 FENCE AND GATE CABLE REINFORCEMENT A. General
Cable reinforcement shall comply with the material requirements of UFC 4-022-03 "Security Engineering: Fences, Gates, and Guard Facilities."
B. Wire Rope
3/4 inch, 6x19 class wire rope; regular lay, extra improved plow steel (EIPS) independent wire rope core (IWRC), Class A galvanized, in accordance with ASTM A 603.
C. Wire Rope Clamps
Type 1, Class 1, galvanized in accordance with Federal Specification FS-FF-C-450.
D. Round Turnbuckle
1-1/4" x 12 inch, Type 1, Grade 1, zinc coated in accordance with ASTM F 1145.
E. Threaded Rods, U-Bolts, and Bolts
Conform to ASTM A 307, installed with F844 washer and A563 nuts. F. Structural Steel
Structural steel construction shall be in accordance with the ninth edition of the AISC Manual of Steel Construction for Allowable Stress Design. Structural steel shall conform to ASTM A 36 and shall have a minimum yield stress of 36,000 psi. All structural steel members and hardware used in cable reinforcing shall be hot-dipped galvanized. Any areas where coating is damaged or removed shall be covered with zinc rich compound.
G. Zinc Rich Compound
95% metallic zinc, by weight in dried film; conforming to FED SPEC DOD-P-21035A and meeting Military Spec MIL-P-26915A.
2.11 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT A. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 13.53 Page 152
Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.
B. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement
Factory-packaged, nonshrink, non-staining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended in writing by manufacturer for exterior applications.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FENCE INSTALLATION
Perform complete installation conforming to ASTM F567. A. Line and Grade
Install fence to the lines and grades indicated. Clear the area on either side of the fence line to the extent indicated. Space line posts equidistant at intervals not exceeding 10 feet. Terminal (corner, gate, and pull) posts shall be set at abrupt changes in vertical and horizontal alignment. Provide fabric continuous between terminal posts; however, runs between terminal posts shall not exceed 500 feet. Repair any damage to galvanized surfaces, including welding, with paint containing zinc dust in accordance with ASTM A780/A780M.
B. Excavation
Clear all post holes of loose material. Spread waste material where directed. Eliminate ground surface irregularities along the fence line to the extent necessary to maintain a 2 inch clearance between the bottom of the fabric and finish grade.
C. Top and Bottom Tension Wire
Install top and bottom tension wires before installing chain-link fabric, and pull wires taut. Place top and bottom tension wires within 8 inches of respective fabric line.
D. Clearing of Fence Line
The site of the fence shall be sufficiently cleared of obstructions, and surface irregularities shall be grades so that the fence will conform to the general contour of the ground. The fence line shall be cleared to minimum width of 10 feet on each side of the centerline of the fence. This clearing shall consist of the removal of all stumps, brush, rocks, trees, or other obstructions which will interfere with proper constructions of the fence. Stumps within the cleared area of the fence shall be removed. All holes remaining after post and stump removal shall be refilled with suitable soil,
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 13.53 Page 153
gravel, or other material acceptable to the Contracting Officer and shall be compacted properly with tampers.
3.2 POST INSTALLATION
Provide excavations for post footings which are drilled holes in virgin or compacted soil and remove loose and foreign materials from holes and the soil moistened prior to placing concrete, of minimum sizes as indicated on the drawings.
Maintain vertical alignment of posts set in concrete construction until concrete has set.
Test fence post rigidity by applying a 50 pound force on the post, perpendicular to the fabric, at 5 feet above ground. Post movement measured at the point where the force is applied shall be less than or equal to 3/4 inch from the relaxed position. Test every tenth post for rigidity. When a post fails this test, make further tests on the next four posts on either side of the failed post. All failed posts shall be removed, replaced, and retested at the Contractor's expense.
Remove excavated soil from Government property.
Provide gate posts spaced as necessary for size of gate openings.
Do not exceed 200 feet on straight runs between braced posts.
3.3 EARTH AND BEDROCK
a. Set posts plumb and in alignment. Except where solid rock is encountered, set posts in concrete to the depth indicated on the drawings. Where solid rock is encountered with no overburden, set posts to a minimum depth of 18 inches in rock. Where solid rock is covered with an overburden of soil or loose rock, set posts to the minimum depth indicated on the drawing unless a penetration of 18 inches in solid rock is achieved before reaching the indicated depth, in which case terminate depth of penetration. Grout all portions of posts set in rock.
b. Portions of posts not set in rock shall be set in concrete from the
rock to ground level. Posts set in concrete shall be set in holes not less than the diameter shown on the drawings. Make diameters of holes in solid rock at least 1 inch greater than the largest cross section of the post. Thoroughly consolidate concrete and grout around each post, free of voids and finished to form a dome. Allow concrete and grout to cure for 72 hours prior to attachment of any item to the posts. Group II line posts may be mechanically driven, for temporary fence construction only, if rock is not encountered. Set driven posts to a minimum depth of 3 feet and protect with drive caps when setting.
c. Test fence post rigidity by applying a 50 pound force on the post,
perpendicular to the fabric, at 5 feet above ground. Post movement measured at the point where the force is applied shall be less than or equal to 3/4 inch from the relaxed position. Test every tenth post for rigidity. When a post fails this test, make further tests
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 13.53 Page 154
on the next four posts on either side of the failed post. All failed posts shall be removed, replaced, and retested at the Contractor's expense.
3.4 CONCRETE MOW TRIP
Provide excavations for concrete mow strip which are excavated in virgin or compacted soil, remove loose, foreign materials from excavations and soil moistened prior to placing concrete, at the sizes indicated on the drawings.
Provide contraction joints spaced at a maximum of 25 feet unless otherwise indicated. Cut contraction joints 3/4 inch deep with a jointing tool after the surface has been finished. Provide 1/2 inch thick EPJ and spaced at a maximum of 100 feet unless otherwise indicated. Provide concrete finish as specified in Section 32 13 13.06 RIGID PAVEMENTS.
3.5 BRACES AND RAILS
Install braces and rails as indicated on the drawings. Peen bolts to prevent easy removal.
Provide corner or pull posts, with bracing in both directions, for changes in direction of 15 degrees or more, or for abrupt changes in grade, with the horizontal brace located at mid-height of the fabric.
Install brace assemblies so posts are plumb when the diagonal rods are under proper tension.
Provide two complete brace assemblies at corner and pull posts where required for stiffness and/or as indicated on the drawings.
3.6 FABRIC INSTALLATION
Install chain link fabric on the side of the post indicated. Attach fabric to terminal posts with stretcher bars and tension bands. Space bands at approximately 15 inch intervals. Install fabric and pull taut to provide a smooth and uniform appearance free from sag, without permanently distorting the fabric diamond or reducing the fabric height. Fasten fabric to line posts at approximately 15 inch intervals and fastened to all rails and tension wires at approximately 18 inch intervals. Thread stretcher bars through or clamped to fabric 4 inches on center and secured to posts with metal bands spaced 15 inches on center. Hog rings shall be spaced 18 inches on center for tying fabric to tension wire. Stretcher bar bands shall be spaced not over 15 inches on center. Bands may also be used in conjunction with special fittings for securing rails to posts. Provide bands with projecting edges chamfered or eased. Twist ends of the tie wires not less than two full turns and bent so as not to present a hazard. Space wire ties 18 inches on center.
Cut fabric by untwisting and removing pickets. Accomplish splicing by weaving a single picket into the ends of the rolls to be joined. The bottom of the installed fabric shall be 2 plus or minus 1/2 inch above the ground.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 13.53 Page 155
After the fabric installation is complete, exercise the fabric by applying a 50 pound push-pull force at the center of the fabric between posts; the use of a 30 pound pull at the center of the panel shall cause fabric deflection of not more than 2.5 inches when pulling fabric from the post side of the fence; every second fence panel shall meet this requirement; re-secure and retest all failed panels at the Contractor's expense.
Install nuts for tension bands and hardware on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side. Peen ends of bolts to prevent removal of nuts.
3.7 BARBED WIRE AND BARBED WIRE SUPPORTING ARMS
Install barbed wire supporting arms and barbed wire as indicated on the drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. Anchor supporting arms to the posts in a manner to prevent easy removal with hand tools or with 3/8 inch diameter plain pin rivets. Pull barbed wire taut and attach to the arms with clips or other means that will prevent easy removal.
Splicing of barbed wire will be permitted if approved by the Contracting Officer and made with an approved wire splice.
3.8 GATE INSTALLATION
Install gates at the locations shown. Mount gates to swing as indicated. Install latches, stops, and keepers as required. Install Slide gates as recommended by the manufacturer.
Weld or otherwise secure hinge pins, and hardware assembly to prevent removal.
Submit copies of operating and maintenance instructions, a minimum of 2 weeks prior to field training. Operating instructions shall outline the step-by-step procedures required for system startup, operation, and shutdown. Include the manufacturer's name, model number, service manual, parts list, and brief description of all equipment and their basic operating features. Include in the maintenance instructions routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and troubleshooting guide. Also include the general gate layout, equipment layout and simplified wiring and control diagrams of the system as installed.
3.9 CABLE REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION FOR FENCES AND GATES
Contractor shall be responsible supplying design calculations and shop drawings of cable reinforcement signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Cable reinforcement shall be installed in accordance with UCF 4-022-03 "Security Engineering: Fences, Gates, and Guard Facilities and shall be rated to stop a 15,000 pound vehicle traveling 50 mph, K12 rated. See drawings for notional design details of cable reinforcing. These design details are not intended to depict the importance or size of each element.
Cables may be installed either between the fence fabric and post or on the outside of the fabric. Cables shall be installed on the exterior
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 13.53 Page 156
side of the post, between the post and fence fabric. Cables should be overlapped, where possible, before terminating at the deadman to ensure that there are no voids of reinforcement along the perimeter. Where overlapping is not possible, other means (such as using bollards) can be used to continue the protective barrier. Cable shall be continuous from deadman to deadman; no splices in cable shall be allowed.
For gates, provide necessary slack within cable to allow for full swing of all gate leaves.
Due to limitations in the penetration resistance provided by single strand cable systems, a minimum of two cables should be provided. The cables should be fastened with wire rope clamps at a height of approximately 30 inches from the ground. The second, or any other additional cables, should be placed 5 inches above or below the first cable and attached to the fencing and anchored to the same deadman in the same manner as the first cable.
Each cable end may be terminated with four wire rope clamps or a wire rope hydraulically swaged press fitting conforming to Military Specification, MS20668. The cable end should be attached to one end of a round turnbuckle with one jaw end and in accordance with ASTM 45908. If located in a corrosive environment, coated or sheathe cable may be used; however, the sheathing shall be removed at the connections.
Reinforcing cable should be terminated to concrete deadman anchors. Anchors are to be placed at a minimum interval of 200 feet and a maximum of 1,000 feet intervals on the site-side of the perimeter fencing with the front edge of the deadman parallel to the fence fabric. Offset deadman anchors from fence at the minimum distance required to avoid interference with post and to allow maintenance access to the turnbuckles, clamps, and other accessories.
Eyebolts embedded in the deadman anchors may have either a welded "T" or "L" end. The eyebolts and their welded extensions should be embedded into the deadman's concrete. The eyebolt can either be in-line with the attached cable or flush against the deadman surface. When used, eyebolts should be welded and galvanized to the anchor rods. The top side of the deadman can either be placed flush with or below the ground surface with the eye of the eyebolt above ground. Threaded rods may also be used as an alternative to the eye bolt when securing the cables to the deadman anchor. When using threaded rods, the threaded rods, the threaded road and wire rope connection should be visible above ground like the eyebolt previously described.
The anchoring system: deadman dimensions or other anchoring systems and burial depth eyebolt embedment depth, etc. should be designed for local soil conditions and the anticipated impact force from 15,000 pound vehicle traveling at 50 mph, K12 rated.
3.10 TOLERANCES
Provide posts that are straight and plumb within a vertical tolerance of 1/4 inch after the fabric has been stretched. Provide fencing and gates that are true to line with no more than 1/2 inch deviation from the established centerline between line posts. Repair defects as directed.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 13.53 Page 157
3.11 ZINC COATING REPAIR
Clean and repair galvanized surfaces damaged by welding or abrasion, and cut ends of fabric, or other cut sections with specified galvanizing repair material applied in strict conformance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.12 GROUNDING
Ground fencing as specified.
Ground fences crossed by overhead powerlines in excess of 600 volts. Electrical equipment attached to the fence shall be grounded.
Ground fences on each side of all gates, at each corner, at the closest approach to each building located within 50 feet of the fence, and where the fence alignment changes more than 15 degrees. Grounding locations shall not exceed 650 feet. Bond each gate panel with a flexible bond strap to its gate post. Ground fences crossed by powerlines of 600 volts or more at or near the point of crossing and at distances not exceeding 150 feet on each side of crossing.
Provide ground conductor consisting of No. 8 AWG solid copper wire. Grounding electrodes shall be 3/4 inch by 10 foot long copper-clad steel rod. Drive electrodes into the earth so that the top of the electrode is at least 6 inches below the grade. Where driving is impracticable, electrodes shall be buried a minimum of 12 inches deep and radially from the fence. The top of the electrode shall not be less than 2 feet or more than 8 feet from the fence. Clamp ground conductor to the fence and electrodes with bronze grounding clamps to create electrical continuity between fence posts, fence fabric, and ground rods. Total resistance of the fence to ground shall not be greater than 25 ohms.
Provide a grounding system that meets the requirements of NFPA 780, including tie-ins to existing lightning protection systems.
3.13 SECURITY
Install new security fencing, remove existing security fencing, and perform related work to provide continuous security for facility. Schedule and fully coordinate work with Contracting Officer and cognizant Security Officer.
3.14 CLEANUP
Remove waste fencing materials and other debris from the work site each workday.
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 14 Page 158
SECTION 32 31 14 ELECTRIC GATE OPERATOR
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. When used, a designation following the "G" designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-02 Shop Drawings
Installation
Wiring and Schematic Diagram
SD-08 Manufacturer's Instructions
Installation
Storage
Operation and Maintenance Training
SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
Operation and Maintenance Manuals; G
SD-11 Closeout Submittals
Warranty 1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE STORAGE, AND HANDLING
Deliver, store, and handle materials and products in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions and industry standards.
Store products indoors in manufacturer's original containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer. Protect from damage.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications
ISO 9001 Certified Manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 14 Page 159
Installation performed by factory authorized contractor specifically trained in gate operation systems of the type found within this section.
a. Provide documentation of maintenance and repair service
availability for emergency conditions
b. Provide quarterly maintenance for one year following Substantial Completion of the Project
1.4 WARRANTY
Provide a 2 year Manufacturer's Standard Limited Warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Acceptable Manufacturer: LiftMaster; 845 Larch Avenue; Elmhurst, IL 60126-1196. ASD. Toll-Free: 800.282.6225. Email: specs@LiftMaster.com. Web: LiftMaster.com or approved equal.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of 01 33 00SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES.
2.2 GATE OPERATORS
LiftMaster SL595 Industrial Gear-Driven Slide Gate Operator or equal. A. Compliance
UL Listed. Compliant to the UL 325, UL 991 and CSA C22.2 No. 247 standards.
Intended for use in Class I, II, III and IV vehicular slide gate applications.
B. Obstruction Sensing System
Inherent sensors such as current sensors. This system is part of the gate operator and may not be removed or bypassed
The installing contractor must furnish an external sensing device such as a photoelectric device or gate edge device to meet UL 325 requirements.
C. Operator Speed
12 inches per second. D. Electrical Power Requirements
115/208/230V AC, single phase, 60 Hz. E. Gear Reduction
20:1 worm gear reducer in synthetic oil bath.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 14 Page 160
F. Motor
1. Switchless 1 HP, Continuous Duty
Supports gate lengths up to 70 feet and gate weights up to 1,700 pounds. 25 recommended cycles per hour.
G. Metal Frame
7 gauge pre-galvanized steel. H. Chassis
Powder-coated galvanized steel. I. Enclosure
NEMA 3R enclosure; oil-tight, weatherproof NEMA 3R cabinet, lockable.
J. Chain
#50 nickel-plated, 25 feet supplied with each unit. K. Overload Protection
Motors shall be protected against overload by thermal protector. L. Motor Control System
Operators shall incorporate a heavy-duty solid-state motor control system and pre- wired class II control circuit with provisions for connecting open-close-stop pushbutton stations, radio controls, and external obstructions sensing systems (contact and non-contact devices) and access control systems (loops, entry systems, phone systems). Control system shall include the following:
Adjustable auto close timer.
Independently adjustable open and close inherent anti-entrapment system.
Selectable control of additional operator (master/slave).
Right-hand/left-hand.
Self-adjusting maximum run timer.
Detected entrapment alarm.
Electronic motor braking.
Emergency pushbutton enabling which activates a pushbutton station when there is a detected entrapment.
Installation/test mode operation.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 14 Page 161
Diagnostic LEDs.
Slave mode operation.
Upgrade-able control processing unit. M. Operator Mounting
Operator shall be pad mounted. N. Transformer
Operators shall have a 40 VA transformer to provide Class II power. O. Surge/Lightning Protection
Protect against lightning strikes at a 50-foot radius. P. Operating Temperature Range
Without heater: -4 degrees F to 140 degrees F. Q. Limits
The operator shall be equipped with an integral limit system that provides ac-curate settings to control the open and close positions of the gate and shall not be affected by manual operation or motor removal.
R. Motor Box
Operation shall be protected from the environment by a steel frame and cover and finished to UL standards. A removable key lock cover shall provide access to the operator.
S. Plug-in Loop Detector Inputs
Programmed inputs for shadow, interrupt and exit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
Inspect and prepare substrates using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving best result for the substrates under project conditions.
Do not proceed with installation until substrates have been prepared using the methods recommended by the manufacturer and deviations from manufacturer's recommended tolerances are corrected. Commencement of installation constitutes acceptance of conditions.
If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect in writing of deviations from manufacturer's recommended installation tolerances and conditions.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 32 31 14 Page 162
3.2 INSTALLATION
Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Test for proper operation and adjust until satisfactory results are obtained.
3.3 GROUNDING
Provide ground conductor consisting of No. 8 AWG solid copper wire. Provide copper-clad steel rod grounding electrodes 3/4 inch by 10 foot long. Drive electrodes into the earth so that the top of the electrode is at least 6 inches below the grade. Where driving is impracticable, bury electrodes a minimum of 12 inches deep and radially from the operator, with top of the electrode not less than 2 feet or more than 8 feet from the operator. Connect ground conductor to the operator and electrodes with bronze grounding clamps to create electrical continuity between the operator and ground rod. Total resistance of the operator post to ground cannot exceed 25 ohms.
3.4 PROTECTION
Protect installed products until completion of project.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Submit electronic copies of manuals at least 2 weeks prior to field training. Submit data complying with the requirements specified in Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA. Submit Data Package 1 for the items/units listed under SD-10 Operation and Maintenance Data
B. Operation and Maintenance Training
Conduct a training course for the members of the operating staff as designated by the Contracting Officer. Make the training period consist of a total of not more than 8 hours of normal working time and start it after all work specified herein is functionally completed and the Performance Tests have been approved. Conduct field instruction that covers all of the items contained in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals as well as demonstrations of routine maintenance operations. Submit the proposed On-site Training schedule concurrently with the Operation and Maintenance Manuals and at least 14 days prior to conducting the training course.
-- End of Section --
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 33 71 02 Page 163
SECTION 33 71 02 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)
ANSI C80.1 (2005)American National Standard for
Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC)
ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)
ASTM B1 (2013) Standard Specification for Hard- Drawn Copper Wire
ASTM B3 (2013) Standard Specification for Soft
or Annealed Copper Wire
ASTM B8 (2011) Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft
INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS (IEEE)
IEEE 81 (2012) Guide for Measuring Earth
Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System
IEEE C2 (2012; Errata 1 2012; INT 1-4 2012;
Errata 2 2013; INT 5-7 2013; INT 8-10 2014; INT 11 2015) National Electrical Safety Code
IEEE Stds Dictionary (2009) IEEE Standards Dictionary:
Glossary of Terms & Definitions
INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION (NETA)
NETA ATS (2013) Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)
ANSI C119.1 (2011) Electric Connectors - Sealed
Insulated Underground Connector Systems Rated 600 Volts
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 33 71 02 Page 164
NEMA FB 1 (2014) Standard for Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable
NEMA TC 2 (2013) Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC) Conduit
NEMA TC 3 (2015) Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing
NEMA WC 70 (2009) Power Cable Rated 2000 V or Less
for the Distribution of Electrical Energy--S95-658
NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)
NFPA 70 (2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2
2013; Errata 2 2013; AMD 3 2014; Errata 3-4 2014; AMD 4-6 2014) National Electrical Code
UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)
UL 1242 (2006; Reprint Mar 2014) Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit -- Steel
UL 467 (2007) Grounding and Bonding Equipment
UL 486A-486B (2013; Reprint Jan 2016) Wire Connectors
UL 510 (2005; Reprint Jul 2013) Polyvinyl
Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape
UL 514B (2012; Reprint Nov 2014) Conduit, Tubing
and Cable Fittings
UL 6 (2007; Reprint Nov 2014) Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel
UL 651 (2011; Reprint May 2014) Standard for
Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings
UL 83 (2014) Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and
Cables
UL 854 (2004; Reprint Nov 2014) Standard for Service-Entrance Cables
1.2 DEFINITIONS
a. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications, and on the drawings, are as defined in IEEE Stds Dictionary.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 33 71 02 Page 165
b. In the text of this section, the words conduit and duct are used interchangeably and have the same meaning.
d. Underground structures subject to aircraft loading are indicated on the drawings.
]1.03 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a "G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES:
SD-03 Product Data
Conduit
Low Voltage Insulated Conductors and Cables
SD-06 Test Reports
Field Acceptance Checks and Tests; G 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements
In each of the publications referred to herein, consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory, as though the word, "must" had been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. Interpret references in these publications to the "authority having jurisdiction," or words of similar meaning, to mean the Contracting Officer. Equipment, materials, installation, and workmanship must be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of IEEE C2 and NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated.
B. Standard Products
Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material, design and workmanship. Products must have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening. The 2-year period must include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size. The product must have been for sale on the commercial market through advertisements, manufacturers' catalogs, or brochures during the 2- year period. Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required, these items must be products of a single manufacturer; however, the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section.
1. Alternative Qualifications
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 33 71 02 Page 166
Products having less than a 2-year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours, exclusive of the manufacturers' factory or laboratory tests, is furnished.
2. Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date
Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site are not acceptable, unless specified otherwise.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT, DUCTS, AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Steel Conduit
ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit
UL 1242. C. Nonmetallic Conduit
UL 651 and NEMA TC 2. D. Fittings
1. Metal Fittings
UL 514B and NEMA FB 1.
2. PVC Conduit Fittings
UL 514B, UL 651 and NEMA TC 3. 2.2 LOW VOLTAGE INSULATED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Insulated conductors must be rated 600 volts and conform to the requirements of NFPA 70, including listing requirements, or in accordance with NEMA WC 70. Wires and cables manufactured more than 24 months prior to date of delivery to the site are not acceptable. Service entrance conductors must conform to UL 854, type USE.
A. Conductor Types
Cable and duct sizes indicated are for copper conductors and THHN/THWN unless otherwise noted. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller must be solid. Conductors No. 8 AWG and larger must be stranded. All conductors must be copper.
B. Conductor Material
Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70, wires in conduit, other than service entrance, must be 600-volt,[ Type THWN/THHN conforming to UL 83. Copper conductors must be annealed copper complying with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
C. Cable Marking
Insulated conductors must have the date of manufacture and other identification imprinted on the outer surface of each cable at regular intervals throughout the cable length.
Identify each cable by means of a fiber, laminated plastic, or non- ferrous metal tags, or approved equal, in each manhole, hand hole, junction box, and each terminal. Each tag must contain the following information; cable type, conductor size, circuit number, circuit voltage, cable destination and phase identification.
Conductors must be color coded. Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. Conductor identification must be by color-coded insulated conductors, plastic-coated self-sticking printed markers, colored nylon cable ties and plates, heat shrink type sleeves, or colored electrical tape. Control circuit terminations must be properly identified. Color must be green for grounding conductors and white for neutrals; except where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box, other neutrals must be white with a different colored (not green) stripe for each. Color of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems must be as follows:
a. 120/240 volt, single phase: Black and red
2.3 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS
Must provide a uniform compression over the entire conductor contact surface. Use solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors.
a. For use with copper conductors: UL 486A-486B.
2.4 LOW VOLTAGE SPLICES
Provide splices in conductors with a compression connector on the conductor and by insulating and waterproofing using one of the following methods which are suitable for continuous submersion in water and comply with ANSI C119.1.
A. Heat Shrinkable Splice
Provide heat shrinkable splice insulation by means of a thermoplastic adhesive sealant material applied in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Cold Shrink Rubber Splice
Provide a cold-shrink rubber splice which consists of EPDM rubber tube which has been factory stretched onto a spiraled core which is removed during splice installation. The installation must not require heat or flame, or any additional materials such as covering or adhesive. It must be designed for use with inline compression type connectors, or indoor, outdoor, direct-burial or submerged locations.
Section 33 71 02 Page 167
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 33 71 02 Page 168
2.5 TAPE A. Insulating Tape
UL 510, plastic insulating tape, capable of performing in a continuous temperature environment of 80 degrees C.
B. Buried Warning and Identification Tape
Provide detectable tape in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
2.6 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Driven Ground Rods
Provide copper-clad steel ground rods conforming to UL 467 not less than 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length.
B. Grounding Conductors
Solid-bare copper No. 8 AWG conductors must conform to ASTM B1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION
Install equipment and devices in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and with the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 as applicable.
3.2 CABLE INSPECTION
Inspect each cable reel for correct storage positions, signs of physical damage, and broken end seals prior to installation. If end seal is broken, remove moisture from cable prior to installation in accordance with the cable manufacturer's recommendations.
3.3 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT A. Requirements
Run conduit in straight lines except where a change of direction is necessary. Provide numbers and sizes of ducts as indicated.
B. Conduit Cleaning
As each conduit run is completed, for conduit sizes 3 inches and larger, draw a flexible testing mandrel approximately 12 inches long with a diameter less than the inside diameter of the conduit through the conduit. After which, draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand and gravel; then immediately install conduit plugs. For conduit sizes less than 3 inches, draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth, sand and gravel; then immediately install conduit plugs.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 33 71 02 Page 169
C. Jacking and Drilling Under Roads and Structures
Conduits to be installed under existing paved areas which are not to be disturbed, and under roads and railroad tracks, must be zinc- coated, rigid steel, jacked into place. Where ducts are jacked under existing pavement, rigid steel conduit must be installed because of its strength. To protect the corrosion-resistant conduit coating, predrilling or installing conduit inside a larger iron pipe sleeve (jack-and-sleeve) is required. For crossings of existing railroads and airfield pavements greater than 50 feet in length, the predrilling method or the jack-and-sleeve method will be used. Separators or spacing blocks must be made of steel, concrete, plastic, or a combination of these materials placed not farther apart than 4 feet on centers. Hydraulic jet method must not be used.
D. Multiple Conduits
Separate multiple conduits by a minimum distance of 3 inches. Stagger the joints of the conduits by rows (horizontally) and layers (vertically) to strengthen the conduit assembly. Provide plastic duct spacers that interlock vertically and horizontally. Spacer assembly must consist of base spacers, intermediate spacers, ties, and locking device on top to provide a completely enclosed and locked-in conduit assembly. Install spacers per manufacturer's instructions, but provide a minimum of two spacer assemblies per 10 feet of conduit assembly.
E. Conduit Plugs and Pull Rope
New conduit indicated as being unused or empty must be provided with plugs on each end. Plugs must contain a weep hole or screen to allow water drainage. Provide a plastic pull rope having 3 feet of slack at each end of unused or empty conduits.
F. Conduit and Duct Without Concrete Encasement
Depths to top of the conduit must be not less than 24 inches below finished grade. Provide not less than 3 inches clearance from the conduit to each side of the trench. Grade bottom of trench smooth; where rock, soft spots, or sharp-edged materials are encountered, excavate the bottom for an additional 3 inches, fill and tamp level with original bottom with sand or earth free from particles, that would be retained on a 1/4 inch sieve. The first 6 inch layer of backfill cover must be sand compacted as previously specified. The rest of the excavation must be backfilled and compacted in 3 to 6 inch layers. Provide color, type and depth of warning tape as specified in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK.
3.4 CABLE PULLING
Pull cables down grade with the feed-in point at buildings of the highest elevation.
A. Cable Lubricants
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 33 71 02 Page 170
Use lubricants that are specifically recommended by the cable manufacturer for assisting in pulling jacketed cables.
3.5 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE SPLICING AND TERMINATING
Make terminations and splices with materials and methods as indicated or specified herein and as designated by the written instructions of the manufacturer. Do not allow the cables to be moved until after the splicing material has completely set. Make splices in underground distribution systems only in accessible locations such as aboveground termination pedestals.
3.6 GROUNDING SYSTEMS
NFPA 70 and IEEE C2, except provide grounding systems with a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 25 ohms.
A. Grounding Electrodes
Provide cone pointed driven ground rods driven full depth plus 6 inches, installed to provide an earth ground of the appropriate value for the particular equipment being grounded. If the specified ground resistance is not met, an additional ground rod must be provided in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 (placed not less than 6 feet from the first rod). Should the resultant (combined) resistance exceed the specified resistance, measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, notify the Contracting Officer immediately.
B. Grounding Connections
Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible, by exothermic weld or compression connector.
a. Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld
manufacturer's written recommendations. Welds which are "puffed up" or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds.
b. Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool
to provide the correct circumferential pressure. Tools and dies must be as recommended by the manufacturer. An embossing die code or other standard method must provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire.
C. Grounding Conductors
Provide bare grounding conductors No. 8 AWG D. Fence Grounding
Provide grounding for fences with a ground rod at each fixed gate post and at each corner post. Drive ground rods until the top is 12 inches below grade. Attach a No. 8 AWG copper conductor, by exothermic weld to the ground rods and extend underground to the
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 33 71 02 Page 171
immediate vicinity of fence post. Lace the conductor vertically into 12 inches of fence mesh and fasten by two approved bronze compression fittings, one to bond wire to post and the other to bond wire to fence. Each gate section must be bonded to its gatepost by a 1/8 by one inch flexible braided copper strap and ground post clamps. Clamps must be of the anti-electrolysis type.
3.7 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING
Provide in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK. A. Reconditioning of Surfaces
1. Unpaved Surfaces
Restore to their original elevation and condition unpaved surfaces disturbed during installation of conduit and cabling. Preserve sod and topsoil removed during excavation and reinstall after backfilling is completed. Replace sod that is damaged by sod of quality equal to that removed.
2. Paving Repairs
Where trenches, pits, or other excavations are made in existing roadways and other areas of pavement where surface treatment of any kind exists , restore such surface treatment or pavement the same thickness and in the same kind as previously existed, except as otherwise specified, and to match and tie into the adjacent and surrounding existing surfaces. Make repairs as specified in Section 32 13 13.06 RIGID PAVEMENTS.
3.8 CONCRETE
Provide concrete in accordance with Section 32 13 13.06 RIGID PAVEMENTS. A. Concrete Slabs (Pads) for Equipment
Unless otherwise indicated, the slab must be at least 8 inches thick, reinforced with a 6 by 6 - W2.9 by W2.9 mesh, placed uniformly 4 inches from the top of the slab. Slab must be placed on a 6 inch thick, well-compacted gravel base. Top of concrete slab must be approximately 4 inches above finished grade with gradual slope for drainage. Edges above grade must have 1/2 inch chamfer. Slab must be of adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment.
Stub up conduits, with bushings, 2 inches into cable wells in the concrete pad. Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable training areas.
B. Sealing
When the installation is complete, seal all conduit and other entries into the equipment enclosure with an approved sealing compound. Seals must be of sufficient strength and durability to protect all energized live parts of the equipment from rodents, insects, or other foreign matter.
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 33 71 02 Page 172
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Performance of Field Acceptance Checks and Tests
Perform in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests, performed in accordance with NETA ATS.
1. Low Voltage Cables, 600-Volt
Perform tests after installation of cable, splices and terminations and before terminating to equipment or splicing to existing circuits.
a. Visual and Mechanical Inspection
(1) Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage.
(2) Verify that cable is supplied and connected in accordance
with contract plans and specifications.
(3) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections.
(4) Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable
match and indentation.
(5) Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition.
(6) Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement.
b. Electrical Tests
(1) Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No. 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately 1000 volts dc for one minute.
(2) Perform continuity tests to insure correct cable
connection.
2. Grounding System
a. Visual and mechanical inspection
Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications.
b. Electrical tests
Perform ground-impedance measurements utilizing the fall-of- potential method in accordance with IEEE 81. On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods, perform tests after interconnections are complete. On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected. Take measurements in normally dry weather, not less than 48 hours after rainfall. Use a portable ground resistance
CYPR152302, Construct Installation Security Fencing, Air-to-Ground
Section 33 71 02 Page 173
tester in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to test each ground or group of grounds. The instrument must be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test. Provide site diagram indicating location of test probes with associated distances, and provide a plot of resistance vs. distance.
B. Follow-Up Verification
Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests, show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function. As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract, the Contracting Officer must be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times of checking and testing.
-- End of Section --